Iom - Bucket Elevators PDF

Installation, Operating & Maintenance Manual
Continuous Chain Type Bucket Elevator
CONTINENTAL CONVEYOR
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.
PREAMBLE
ME.240.01.02.0
2.
WARRANTY
ME.240.01.02.0
3.
SCOPE
ME.240.01.02.0
4.
SAFETY
ME.240.01.03.0
5.
SHIPPING & RECEIVING
ME.240.01.04.0
6.
STORAGE
ME.240.01.05.0
7.
HANDLING
ME.240.01.05.0
8.
INSTALLATION
ME.240.01.08.0
9.
STARTING UP
ME.240.01.19.0
10. INITIAL OPERATION
ME.240.01.21.0
11. NORMAL OPERATION
ME.240.01.21.0
12. INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE
ME.240.01.22.0
Date: 19-10-2000
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ME.240.01.01.00
CONTINENTAL CONVEYOR & MACHINE WORKS LTD.

470, St-Alphonse S., Thetford Mines, Quebec, Canada G6G 3V8; Tel: (418) 338-4682 - Fax: (418) 338-4751 - Internet: continental@minfo.net

1.
PREAMBLE
The Continental Bucket Elevator you have just purchased was designed specifically for
your needs and type of installation. They are manufactured to precise standards and are
designed to give many years of trouble free operation. This however can only be
expected if the equipment is maintained and preventive maintenance is practised. This
matter is entirely up to you, and it is with this in mind that we furnish you with this
instruction manual to simplify your task in ensuring that installation and maintenance is
carried out properly and routinely.
2.
WARRANTY
The material and workmanship herein sold shall be guaranteed for a period of one (1)
year from and after starting operation of said equipment; provided, however, that unless
otherwise herein after stated, the guarantee period of one (1) year shall be computed
from a date not more than two (2) months after shipment of equipment from our plant. If
at any time within said one (1) calendar year period, it is established to our satisfaction
that any part or parts of our manufacture were defective at the time they were furnished,
we will promptly repair such part or parts, if delivered f.o.b. our factory, or at our option
we will supply f.o.b. our factory, replacement parts for such defective parts. This
guarantee will not apply if any defect is attributable to any information, drawing on
schedule provided to us by you the client as a result of misuse or abuse of this
equipment. It is mutually agreed that we give no other guarantee, and that we are not to
be held liable for loss, damage or expense of any nature, arising from defective material,
workmanship or parts. We will make no allowance for repairs, alterations, or other work
done unless specifically agreed to in writing beforehand.
This guarantee covers parts, machines or equipment manufactured by us. All other
equipment, electrical components, accessories or parts, will be covered with the original
manufacturers' warranty or guarantee.
Where performance or production figures are given, these are to be considered as
maximum capacities based on information supplied to us. No guarantee, unless
specifically stated in writing herein, with regard to performance or production is to be
understood to exist.
3.
SCOPE
This information manual contains the installation, operating, lubrication and maintenance
instructions relative to Continental Bucket Elevators. For dimensions, characteristics,
spare parts and operating conditions, refer to the certified drawing(s) provided with this
manual or under separate cover.
Date: 19-10-2000
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ME.240.01.02.00

This manual is intended only as an aid to installation, operation and maintenance of the
equipment in question. It is based on the premise that only qualified workmen will
perform service work using good workmanship practise at all times.
4.
SAFETY
Compliance with safety standards, including OSHA and other Federal, Provincial or local
codes or regulations, is the responsibility of the user of the bucket elevator installation.
The following safety practices are recommended and should be strictly observed.
4.1
General
Bucket Elevators must never be operated unless the housing completely encloses
the moving elements. All necessary housings, covers, safety guards, railings,
gratings and power transmission guards must be in place. If the bucket elevator
is to be opened for inspection, cleaning or observation, the motor driving the
bucket elevator must be locked out electrically in such manner that it cannot be
started by anyone, however remote from the area, unless the bucket elevator
housing has been closed and all guards are in place. The housings, covers and
guards are necessary to prevent anyone from entering, reaching or falling into the
machinery which may result in serious personal injury.
If the bucket elevator must have an open housing as a condition of its use, the
entire open bucket elevator must be guarded by a railing, fence or rugged safety
grating.
Feed openings for shovel, front end loader or other mechanical equipment shall
be constructed in such a way that the bucket elevator is covered by rugged
grating. If the nature of the material is such that a grating can't be used, then the
exposed section of the bucket elevator is to be guarded by a railing and warning
signs shall be posted.
4.2
Openings
Do not place hands or feet in any bucket elevator opening to avoid being caught
between any moving bucket elevator parts.
4.3
Covers and guards
4.4
Do not walk on the bucket elevator covers or gratings or power transmission

guards to avoid falling into or against moving parts.
Stuck materials
Date: 19-10-2000
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ME.240.01.03.00


Do not poke or prod material into the bucket elevator using a bar or a stick to
avoid being struck.
4.5
Capacity
Do not overload the bucket elevator or use it for anything but its intended use.
4.6
Housekeeping
Practice good housekeeping in the area of the bucket elevator.
5.
SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

5.1
Shipping
Prior to shipment, this equipment is thoroughly inspected to ensure that all parts
were as specified and in perfect condition. If they are in any way damaged after
acceptance by you, it is entirely your responsibility. Therefore, extreme care
should be taken during the unloading process to ensure that no damage occurs at
this point.
5.2
Shipping conditions
Unless otherwise specified, Bucket Elevators are shipped in unpacked condition
and, depending on necessity, fixed to wooden pallets or skids.
The Bucket Elevator is shop assembled wherever feasible. All pulleys have been
assembled on their respective shafts. These shafts are further mounted in the
structural sections of the elevator.
The pillow block bearings or flange bearings, unless otherwise specified, have
been filled with their initial quantity of suitable grease for operation. They should
be maintained in accordance with the manufacturer's maintenance manual found
in the subvendor section of this manual.
The gear reducer, unless otherwise specified, does not have its initial filling of oil
for operation. Filling should be carried out in accordance with the manufacturer's
maintenance manual found in the subvendor section of this manual, always
respecting the specified oil quantity and grade for the reducer size and operating
environment.
Date: 19-10-2000
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ME.240.01.04.00


The chain guard (if applicable), depending upon application, is either Type 1 (dust
tight, manual lubrication) or Type 2 (oil tight, oil bath lubrication). In the case of
Type 1, the chain must be lubricated prior to operation with a suitable lubricant. In
the case of Type 2, the chain guard must be filled to the correct level with a
suitable lubricant.
5.3
Receiving
Copies of the packing slips describe all the material shipped. During the
unloading process, check each piece individually against the packing slip to
ensure it is included in the shipment. It is also at this time that the equipment
should be checked for damage that may have occurred during transport. Claims
for shortages or damaged material must be filed immediately with the carrier
company and Continental Conveyor as we have no authority to allow any claims.
5.4
Preservation
Shaft extensions and exposed machined surfaces are protected with a rust
inhibitor. This should be removed with solvent prior to installation of drives or couplings.
6.
STORAGE
Bucket Elevators often arrive on the jobsite well before they are scheduled to be installed.
For this reason, they should be stored inside to protect them from exposure to weather
or other adverse conditions. Should this not be possible, they should at least be covered,
with particular attention given to the elevator drive. This is satisfactory only for short term
periods (under two (2) months). If storage time is to be longer, ensure that they are
stored inside.
For extended storage, the pillow block bearings or flange bearings, gear reducer and
chain drive (if applicable) should be preserved in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. See the subvendor section of this manual for further information.
7.
HANDLING
Extreme care must be exercised in lifting and moving sections of preassembled elevators
or individual bucket elevators longer than twelve (12) feet. Use of a spreader bar with
slings is recommended for lifting. Standard elevator components are designed for
support at ten (10) to twelve (12) foot intervals, otherwise misalignment and permanent
bending may result.
Date: 19-10-2000
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ME.240.01.05.00


When unloading from trucks the elevators should be lifted at two points separated
sufficiently to provide equal overhang at each end, not in excess of ten (10) feet.
Midspan between lifting points should not be more than the total overhang at ends
(maximum of twenty (20) feet with ten (10) feet overhang each end).
If elevators cannot be unloaded by hoisting as described above, they may be pulled out
lengthwise. The trailing end must be supported at the same elevation as the leading end
while withdrawing. Once the elevator is withdrawn to an overhang of approximately ten
(10) feet, it should be supported at that point before withdrawing further.
Never lift only one end of an elevator assembly if its length exceeds twelve (12) feet.
If unusually heavy components are attached to one end of the bucket elevator assembly,
such as drive units, consideration should be given to their bending effect when hoisting
points are selected.
Date: 19-10-2000
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ME.240.01.06.00



FIGURE 1
1.
Discharge spout
2.
Steel split upper head section
3.
Head sprocket
4.
Roller bearing pillow blocks and

head shaft
5.
Roller bearing
support
6.
Elevator chain
7.
Self supporting casing with steel

side panels braked for stiffness.
Jig welded dust tight construction
8.
Inlet spout
9.
Steel boot section
pillow
blocks
10. Front and rear access panels

11. Screw or internal gravity take up to
assure proper alignment of foot
shaft, sprockets and chain
12. Large access doors for easy
inspection
13. Elevator buckets
Date: 19-10-2000
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ME.240.01.07.00

8.
INSTALLATION
Bucket Elevators are to be installed in accordance with the certified general arrangement
drawing provided with this manual or under separate cover. The presence of all the
necessary parts is to be confirmed prior to beginning assembly. (See 5.3).
8.1
Preparation of site
The installation site must firstly be cleared of all foreign objects and material in
order to ensure free and easy access to the site.
Bucket Elevators must be mounted on a concrete pad and held down by anchor
bolts. All the foundation anchor bolts and other steelwork embedded in the
concrete must be check for cleanliness, accuracy of location and alignment.
Under no circumstances may erection begin if the concrete pad is incorrectly
prepared and unable to receive the boot section as it was originally designed.
8.2
Concrete pad
The following points (A & B in Figure 2 - page 9) on the concrete pad must be
checked before erection begins.
The anchor bolts must be positioned and the projection must be as shown on the
general arrangement drawing. If the error is small, the bolt holes may be slightly
enlarged, however if this is not possible, the bolts must be relocated.
Any sizeable discrepancy in the location of the anchor bolts will cause additional
trouble later on the erection of the elevator. Tie in points could be missed, loading
and discharge misdirected and even interference from existing structures.
8.3
Boot section
When this is completed, the boot section may be positioned.
The boot section is placed over the anchor bolts. The drawing should be checked
as to the inlet side and the boot positioned accordingly.
The boot section must be level horizontally and plumb vertically. Failure here will
seriously impede the elevator's performance.
Shim and grout the boot section until level and plumb. Use carpenter's levels on
the flanges. Only after this has been accomplished can the boot be bolted down.
Date: 19-10-2000
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ME.240.01.08.00


Care must be taken not to disturb the boot section.

FIGURE 2
8.4
Intermediate sections
With the boot section complete, the intermediate sections may now be installed.
The general arrangement drawing must be followed to achieve the proper
sequence of the sections. All the sections will have been pre-numbered at the
works. If gasketing material has been specified, it is important that it be inserted
between all the flanges.
The suggested method of lifting and plumbing each section is outlined below. The
cross bracing should be field fabricated and bolted to the four (4) corners before
raising. Each section must be plumbed to a tolerance of 1/8" maximum before it
is tightened and made ready to receive the next section. When the sections are
being plumbed, only secure the corner and intermediate bolts. The balance can
be installed after the section is plumbed.
The flanges on the casing sections are not machined and it is, therefore, possible
that small fabrication inaccuracies within structural tolerances may be present.
Check each section as it is placed in position and, if necessary, rotate 180o. If
Date: 19-10-2000
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ME.240.01.09.00


inaccuracy is not compensated for, invert section end over end. If necessary, the
sections as inverted may be rotated 180o.
Naturally, sections with doors or openings cannot be inverted. However, it may
be possible to rotate these sections 180 o to achieve plumbness.
FIGURE 3
The lower head section can now be assembled to the top intermediate section.
Date: 19-10-2000
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ME.240.01.010.00


The maximum out of plumb tolerance between the boot section and the lower
head section should not exceed 1/4" maximum.
By employing the above erection practice, small variations are compensated for
instead of compounded.
When warranted, wind bracing may be furnished to fasten the elevator casing
firmly to an adjoining structure. Wind bracing is installed as each casing section is
being erected. Bracing is first bolted to the casing, then shimmed, bolted and
grouted to the supporting structure without disturbing the casing alignment.
If the elevator is installed indoors, each casing section, as being erected, should
be secured to the floor framing or building framework.
8.5
Head section
The lower head section should now be assembled to balance of the elevator. This
section, like all the others, must be plumbed accurately.
The head shaft assembly can now be mounted on the bearing supports, which
are an integral part of the lower head section. This head shaft must be level and
parallel with the foot shaft. If necessary, shim under the bearings to achieve this
condition.
It should be noted here that the foot shaft has been assembled forward or towards
the loading side of the elevator. This is shown on the general arrangement
drawing.
The offset distance is half the difference between the pitch diameter of the head
sprocket and the pitch diameter of the foot sprocket.
The foot shaft is mounted in this location at the factory. Nevertheless, two plumb
lines dropped from the head shaft, each near the end of the shaft, must be used
to check parallel position of the head and foot shafts. This should also be used to
check the correct centerline offset of the head and foot shafts.
Care must be exercised in checking the offset distance as the head and foot
shafts are usually not the same diameter.
Date: 19-10-2000
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ME.240.01.011.00


FIGURE 4
Date: 19-10-2000
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ME.240.01.012.00


8.6
Drive unit
The drive platform and brackets can be bolted firmly in position following the
erection of the head section. Level platform and secure all bolts.
The drive machinery unit can now be mounted to the drive platform. Both the
driven sprocket mounted on the head shaft and the drive sprocket mounted on the
drive unit must be in line. In addition, both the drive shaft and head shaft must be
parallel to one another. They must also be located according to the position and
dimension given on the general arrangement drawing.
Where an order covers standard elevator equipment and the elevator drive is
located independently from the elevator casing, our engineering responsibilities
will be defined as follows:
"No engineering or contingent responsibility is assumed for the elevator drive
located independently on customers' building steel, building floors, walkways, etc.
It is assumed that, in purchasing an individual elevator(s) with an independent
drive support, full consideration has been given to the dampening of vibration that
may be detrimental to the drive machinery, elevator machinery and/or to the
structural supports."
8.6.1 Drive unit incorporated in elevator casing
This arrangement (Figure 5 #1) will maintain fixed centers between drive
and driven sprockets. This eliminates opposite pulsating and/or vibrating
action between elevator proper and drive unit.
8.6.2 Drive mounted independently of elevator
This arrangement (Figure 5 #2) cannot maintain fixed centers of drive and
driven sprockets due to movement of drive base and elevator. This can
lead to wear on the bearings, chain, sprockets, buckets and bearing
support failure. If this method is to be used, it must be secured very rigidly
to the elevator on both the vertical and horizontal plane.
Date: 19-10-2000
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ME.240.01.013.00



FIGURE 5
Date: 19-10-2000
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ME.240.01.014.00

8.7
Chain installation
Prior to installing the chain, the foot shaft take-up must first be positioned at the
upper end of its travel. If the elevator is equipped with a gravity type take-up, tie it
off at the highest point of its travel to the take-up beam assembled in the
intermediate section of the access doors. Should the elevator not be equipped
with a lift beam, pass a lifting beam through the access doors on opposite sides of
the casing and support the take-up from it.
Two methods of fitting the chain can be used. They are dependent to a large
extent on the elevator height and available lifting equipment.
8.7.1 Where it can be lowered from the top of the elevator casing.
8.7.2 Where it cannot be lowered from the top of the elevator casing.
FIGURE 6
Date: 19-10-2000
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ME.240.01.015.00



FIGURE 7
Date: 19-10-2000
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ME.240.01.016.00



FIGURE 8
Date: 19-10-2000
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ME.240.01.017.00

8.8
Installing buckets
After the chain has been mounted and adjusted properly, the buckets can be
attached to the chain. Be sure to insert the bolts with the nuts to the inside of the
bucket. Note that the leather washers must be inserted between the chain and
the buckets.
Block the chain and mount approximately five (5) buckets. Snub the chain and
rotate until buckets are in the boot sections. Mount five (5) more buckets. Fill in
with the remaining buckets so that the weight of the buckets is distributed equally
to the front and back of the elevator to prevent chain from running away.
After initial run of approximately eight (8) hours, the nuts should be retightened
and the bolt threads should be prick-punched to prevent loosening of nuts.
8.9
Drive chain and backstop

The drive chain should now be mounted. On all offset sidebar drive chain, the
chain should travel with the closed end forward. Both the chain and sprockets will
have longer life when mounted in this fashion.
Mount the chain guard as indicated on the general arrangement drawing. Mount
head shroud on head section.
The boot section should have all foreign matter and debris removed before initial
operation of the elevator.
Reducer is shipped without oil. Before starting, fill to level indicated with proper oil
selected from chart in the manufacturer's maintenance manual found in the
subvendor section of this manual.
It is recommended that all elevators be equipped with a positive stopping device.
This feature will eliminate extensive damage to the equipment by preventing a
backward action of the elevator. This could be caused by a power failure or some
other unforeseen circumstance. Without this feature, material and/or equipment
could be dropped into the boot whenever an unscheduled stoppage occurred.
If backstop was not furnished with this unit, it will be necessary to stop feed to the
elevator and discharge material from all buckets before elevator is shut down.
The backstop is an emergency device only and should not be used to prevent
backward actions under normal conditions.
Date: 19-10-2000
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ME.240.01.018.00


FIGURE 9
9.
STARTING UP
It is imperative to adhere to the following procedures prior to start-up of the Bucket
Elevator. Their observation will assure long service life and safe operation. Hence, great
care should be observed while carrying out these procedures prior to the initial operation
of the elevator.
9.1
Prior to starting
The following check points should be reviewed before initial operation of unit.
Date: 19-10-2000
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ME.240.01.019.00


9.1.1 Head and foot shafts parallel to each other and sprockets in line. Should
your elevator be equipped with a segmental rim traction wheel or sprocket,
check the bolts for correct torque values.
BOLT
DIAMETER
TORQUE
VALUE
5/8"
80 ft. lbs.
3/4"
320 ft. lbs.
1"
710 ft. lbs.
9.1.2 Check recommended torque for set screws on bearings, traction wheels
and sprockets.
SET SCREW
SIZE
TORQUE
VALUE
5/16"
125 in. lbs.
3/8"
225 in. lbs.
7/16"
325 in. lbs.
1/2"
475 in. lbs.
5/8"
1100 in. lbs.
9.1.3 Casings plumb to within given tolerance.

9.1.4 All bolts joining all sections tightened.
9.1.5 Drive chain oiled - oil in chain guard (if oil type guard furnished).
9.1.6 Reducer filled with oil to proper level.
9.1.7 Correct motor rotation.
9.1.8 All buckets mounted with all bolts tightened.
9.1.9 All lateral supports in place and secured.
Date: 19-10-2000
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ME.240.01.020.00

9.1.10 Hold down bolts on top of internal gravity take-up in place about 2" above
the top of the take-up frame. (Applicable to elevators having gravity type
take-ups.)
10. INITIAL OPERATION

The Bucket Elevator should be operated empty for approximately eight (8) hours prior to
transporting material. During this time, the equipment should be observed for unusual
noise, vibration or abnormalities such as excess of current draw by the motor or
overheating of pillow block bearings or the gear reducer.
None of the above should be present if all installation instructions in this manual were
followed.
It is also suggested that the hold back device be tested at this time. While the unit is
operating, turn off the power and check the holding action of the device. It should grab
immediately without allowing the chain and buckets to reverse their direction of travel.
Before starting normal operation, all bucket bolts should be retightened and bolt threads
should be prick-punched to prevent loosening of nuts.
11. NORMAL OPERATION

Elevators should be started with buckets empty. Starting under load places undue strain
on chain and drive machinery. Therefore, it is imperative to follow all buckets to empty
before stopping elevator.
Material should be centrally delivered at the specified uniform rate. Avoid loading
buckets to the extent of material spilling back down into the boot section. Boot must not
be allowed to pile up with spilled material.
The Continental buckets are designed to travel at a speed and capacity adaptable to the
type of material being handled. Do not make any changes in material, material size,
capacity, moisture content of speed of travel without first consulting Continental.
Under normal operating conditions and to obtain the capacity specified, the buckets
should only be filled at 75% of their capacity.
The operator(s) should become familiar with all aspects of the construction and normal
operating conditions of the equipment. Thereby, immediately recognizing an abnormal
situation or operating condition before serious damage occurs.
Date: 19-10-2000
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ME.240.01.021.00


12. INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

No special tools or equipment are needed to maintain or service your Bucket Elevator. A
standard torque wrench, obtainable at any local mill supply house, is to be used when
checking sprocket rim bolts or set screws.
Refer to the lubricating chart for complete information regarding recommended procedure
and material covering all components.
When reducers are idle for an extended period of time, they should be completely filled
with oil to prevent the seals from drying out. Drain down to proper oil level before starting
unit.
Check the oil level of the reducer weekly. Also check for water condensation in the oil. If
water is present, drain completely, flush out and fill to correct level with new oil.
Date: 19-10-2000
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
ME.240.01.022.00

Drive Service Manual

TABLE OF CONTENTS
1.
2.
3.
MOTOR AND GEAR UNIT

Motor Installation
Page 2
Operation
Page 2
Inspection and maintenance
Page 2
V-BELT DRIVE
Sheave Installation
Page 2
Belt Installation
Page 3
Belt Tension
Page 3
Operation
Page 5
Page 5
CHAIN DRIVE
Sprocket Installation
Page 5
Chain Installation and Tensioning Procedure
Page 6
Operation
Page 6
Page 6
Lubrication
Page 7
Date: 27-01-2000 / 09:08:10
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Page #1
470, St-Alphonse S., Thetford Mines, Quebec, Canada G6G 3V8; Tel: (418) 338-4682 - Fax: (418) 338-4751 E-mail : VentesTM@continentalconveyor.ca

1.
Motor and Gear Unit

1.1
Motor Installation
1.1.1 Mount the motor assembly to the motor mount of the gear reducer or mounting
area on the conveyor body. DO NOT TIGHTEN AT THIS TIME.
1.1.2 Check the alignment of the motor shaft and conveyor drive shaft. The shafts
must be parallel. The motor should be shimmed if necessary for paralle
alignment.
1.1.3 DO NOT tighten motor mount bolts at this time, to allow for adjustment of
V-belt or drive.
1.2
Operation
1.2.1 After the entire installation has been completed, the amperage should be
checked for current overloading conditions. The current operating limits are
located on the motor plate.
1.3
Inspection and Maintenance

1.3.1 Motor and switch wiring should be checked for compliance with the applicable
electrical codes and standards.
1.3.2 In the event that lubrication ports are provided on the motor, periodic
lubrication should be performed.
2.
V-Belt Drive
2.1
Sheave Installation
2.1.1 Install the drive and driven sheaves as specified on the conveyor drawing.
Using a straight edge, align the two sheaves in the same plane. Place the
straight edge along the outside surface of the drive sheave and locate the
driven sheave outside surface to align with the straight edge. Recheck the
shaft alignment.
Date: 27-01-2000 / 09:08:10
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Page #2

2.2
Belt Installation (High tension & standard)

2.2.1 Install the correct number of drive belts, corresponding to the number of
sheave grooves on the sheaves. DO NOT ride, pry or force the belts into
position. This will damage the belt and reduce the service life.
2.2.2 Properly tension the belts as set forth below for the particular type of belt (high
tension or standard).
2.3
Belt Tension
2.3.1 High tension (Dyna-V or Ultra-V)
2.3.1.1
Adjust take-up until belts are seated and start drive. When it is
operating at full load and full speed, adjust take-ups until only a slight
bow appears on the slack side. Stop the drive.
2.3.1.2
2.3.1.3
Measure the span length 'K'.

Apply the force (perpendicular to span at center of the span)
required to deflect the belt 1/64" per inch of span length see drawing.
The force can be applied by means of simple spring scale.
Belt
Section
3V
5V
8V
Date: 27-01-2000 / 09:08:10
Recommended belt deflection force

Force (lbs.)
Outside Diameter
RPM of
of Small Sheave
Small Sheave
Minimum Maximum
2.65 to 3.35
1200 to 3600
3.00
4.25
3.65 to 4.50
900 to 1800
3.50
5.25
4.75 to 6.00
900 to 1800
4.25
6.00
7.10 to 9.00
600 to 1500
8.75
12.75
9.25 to 11.80
600 to 1200
9.50
14.00
12.50 to 16.00
400 to 900
10.50
15.25
12.50 to 17.00
400 to 900
21.50
31.00
18.00 to 22.40
200 to 700
23.50
34.00
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Page #3

2.3.1.4
Compare the force required in Step 3 with values given in table

above. The force required should be within the minimum and
maximum values shown. A new set of belts should be initially
tensioned 1/3 greater than the maximum value.
Care: See Screw Conveyor Service Manual for proper screw
alignment before initial start up.
2.3.1.5
Recheck tension of new belts several times in the first 50 hours

of operation and adjust if necessary. Thereafter, check the belt
tension periodically.
2.3.2 Standard (Sections A, B, C, D & E)

2.3.2.1
2.3.2.2
Measure the span length 'K' as illustrated below.

Apply the force (perpendicular to span at center of the span)
required to deflect the belt 1/64" per inch of span length see
drawing. The force can be applied by means of simple spring scale.
Belt
Section
A
B
C
D
E
2.3.2.3
Date: 27-01-2000 / 09:08:10
Recommended Belt Deflection Force

Force (lbs.)
Minimum
Maximum
2.00
2.75
4.00
5.50
8.75
12.00
17.00
23.00
26.50
37.00
Compare the force required in Step 2 with values given in table

above. The force required should be within the minimum and
maximum values shown. A new set of belts deflection force is 1/3
greater than the maximum recommended force because the tension
drops rapidly during the V-belt run-in period.
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Page #4

2.3.2.4
2.4
Recheck tension of new belts several times in the first 50 hours

of operation and adjust if necessary. Thereafter, check the belt
tension periodically.
Operation
2.4.1 After the belts are properly tensions, the sheave and shaft alignment should be
checked. Proper belt alignment and tension are necessary to maintain
standard service life.
2.4.2 During initial conveyor start up under load, check for belt slippage. DO NOT
use belt dressing.
2.4.3 After approximately eight (8) hours operation time under load, the belt tension
and alignment should be re-checked.
2.5
Inspection
2.5.1 The belts should be routinely inspected for wear and proper tension.
2.5.2 Sheave and shaft alignment should be checked in belts shown excess wear
during short periods of time.
2.5.3 Before replacing worn belts, the sheave grooves should be checked for
roughness, worn side walls and alignment. If sheave grooves show roughness
and worn side walls, the sheave should be replaced and new belts installed. If
sheave alignment is off, adjustment must be made before installing new belts.
3.
Chain Drive
3.1
Sprocket Installation
3.1.1 Install the drive and driver sprockets as specified by the conveyor drawing.
Locate each sprocket as close as possible to a bearing.
Date: 27-01-2000 / 09:08:10
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Page #5

3.1.2 Using a straight edge, align the sprockets. Place the finished sides of the
sprockets as shown on the drawing below.
3.2
Chain Installation and Tensioning Procedure

3.2.1 Place chain around sprockets with the connecting links meeting on one of the
sprockets. Insert connecting link. It may be necessary to remove any excess
chain. The chain should be installed with only a small amount of slack.
3.2.2 Tension the chain by adjusting the motor assembly. The chain should be
snug.
3.3
Operation
3.3.1 The chain must be well oiled before initial operation. Oil should be applied to
the chain pin bushing, outside the plate and inside the plate edges. A good
grade of non detergent petroleum base oil is recommended.
3.3.2 Install the chain guard before operation.
3.3.3 During the first hours of operation, the drive chain will elongate. This is
normal. The chain should be checked several times during the first eight (8)
hours of operation. The chain drive should be run snug.
3.4
Inspection & Maintenance

3.4.1 The chain sprockets should be checked periodically for proper alignment.
3.4.2 The chain should be checked for excessive slack. If the chain is running high
on the large sprocket the chain should be replaced. Continued operation will
damage the sprocket.
Date: 27-01-2000 / 09:08:10
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Page #6

3.5
Lubrication
3.5.1 Ineffective lubrication is the most prevalent cause of poor chain life. There are
various lubrication methods used, depending on chain speed. The proper
lubrication method should be adhered to per application.
3.5.1.1
Manual lubrication : oil is applied periodically with a brush or

spout can, preferably once every 8 hours of operation. Volume and
frequency should be sufficient to prevent discoloration of lubrication in
the chain joints.
3.5.1.2
Bath or disc lubrication : with bath lubrication, the lower strand

of chain runs through a sump of oil in the drive housing. The oil level
should reach the pitch line of the chain at its lowest point while
operating. With disc lubrication, the chain operates above the oil
level. The disc picks up oil from the sump and deposits it onto the
chain, usually by means of a trough. The diameter of the disc should
be such as to produce rim speeds between 600 FPM minimum and
8000 FPM maximum.
Date: 27-01-2000 / 09:08:10
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Page #7
Mounting and Dismounting

of Rolling Bearings
Publ. No. WL 80 100/3 EA
FAG OEM und Handel AG

A company of the FAG Kugelfischer Group
Postfach 12 60 D-97419 Schweinfurt
Tel. (0 97 21) 91-0 Fax (0 97 21) 91 34 35
Telex 67345-0 fag d

of Rolling Bearings
Publ. No. WL 80 100/3 EC/ED
FAG Bearings Corporation

200 Park Avenue,
Danbury, Connecticut, USA 06813-1933
Tel. (800) 243-2532 Fax (203) 830-8171
FAG Bearings Limited

5965 Coopers Avenue,
Mississauga, Ontario, Canada L4Z 1R9
Tel. (0905) 890-9770 Fax (0905) 890-9779
FAG | 2
Preface
Rolling bearings are heavy-duty machine elements with high-precision components. In order to fully utilize their capacity, the design engineer must select the right bearing type and design and match the
bearing properties to those of the mating components. Mounting and
dismounting, lubrication, sealing and maintenance must also be given special attention.
Appropriate means for mounting and dismounting of rolling bearings
as well as utmost cleanliness and care at the assembly site are necessary in order to enable the bearings to reach a long service life.
This publication is intended to inform bearing servicemen and maintenancemen on handling, mounting and dismounting, lubrication and
maintenance of rolling bearings. A special chapter deals with bearing
failures and their causes. The tables in the annex specify bearing
numbers, tolerances of bearings and their mating components, bearing clearance and FAG rolling bearing greases Arcanol.
For information on special mounting and dismounting tools and methods and on measuring instruments, further publications are available.
Bearing mounting problems beyond the scope of this publication
should be referred to our Engineering Service.
3 | FAG
Table of Contents
1.
Rolling bearing storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.
How to prepare rolling bearings for mounting

and dismounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Work planning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
The right bearing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Handling of rolling bearings before mounting . . . . . . . .
Cleanliness in mounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Surrounding parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fits. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inspection of bearing seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cylindrical seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tapered seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
15
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.7.1
2.7.2
3.
3.1
3.1.1
3.1.2
3.2
3.2.1
3.2.2
3.2.3
3.2.4
3.2.5
3.2.6
3.3
3.4
3.4.1
FAG | 4
18
18
18
24
29
30
30
32
32
34
35
36
40
3.4.2
3.4.3
Rolling bearing mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mechanical methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting of cylindrical bore bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mounting of tapered bore bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thermal methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oil bath . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hot air cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Induction heating device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Induction coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Clearance adjustment on mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Angular contact ball bearings and tapered roller
bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Thrust bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Machine tool bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.
4.1
4.1.1
4.1.2
4.1.2.1
4.1.2.2
4.2
4.2.1
4.2.2
4.2.3
4.3
4.3.1
4.3.2
Rolling bearing dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Mechanical methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dismounting of cylindrical bore bearings . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dismounting of tapered bore bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dismounting of adapter sleeve mounted bearings . . . .
Dismounting of withdrawal sleeve mounted bearings. .
Thermal methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heating ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Induction coil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ring burner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dismounting of tapered bore bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dismounting of cylindrical bore bearings . . . . . . . . . . . .
51
52
52
55
55
56
57
57
58
59
60
61
63
5.
5.1
5.2
5.3
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Greases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
65
66
66
40
46
46
Table of Contents
6.
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.2
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
Rolling bearing damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Why does a bearing fail? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Faulty mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passage of electric current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Imperfect lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to recognize bearing damage in operation? . . . . .
How to pinpoint bearing damage? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Observations prior to dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Observations during dismounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bearing inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
71
71
73
74
75
75
77
78
78
79
81
7.
7.1
7.2
7.3
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bearing designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Designation of bearing series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shaft seat diameters Metric bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inch bore adapter sleeves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Metric bore adapter and withdrawal sleeves . . . . . . .
Housing seat diameters Metric bearings. . . . . . . . . . .
Tolerance symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Standard tolerances of metric radial bearings . . . . . . . .
Standard tolerances of metric thrust bearings. . . . . . . .
Standard tolerances of metric tapered roller bearings .
Tolerances of inch-size radial bearings . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tolerances of inch-size thrust ball bearings . . . . . . . . . .
Standard tolerances of inch-size tapered roller bearings
Radial clearance of deep groove ball bearings . . . . . . .
Radial clearance of self-aligning ball bearings. . . . . . . .
Radial clearance of cylindrical roller bearings
with cylindrical bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial clearance of cylindrical roller bearings
with tapered bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial clearance of spherical roller bearings
with cylindrical bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial clearance of spherical roller bearings
with tapered bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial clearance of barrel roller bearings . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axial clearance of angular contact ball bearings,
double row . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axial clearance of four-point ball bearings . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial clearance reduction of cylindrical
roller bearings with tapered bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial clearance reduction of spherical
roller bearings with tapered bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rolling bearing greases Arcanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
83
84
86
93
94
95
101
102
103
104
104
105
105
106
106
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.11
7.12
7.13
7.14
7.15
7.16
7.17
7.18
7.19
7.20
7.21
7.22
7.23
107
108
109
109
110
110
111
111
112
113
5 | FAG
Chart: Tools and Methods for Mounting and Dismount

Bearing type
Bearing
bore
Bearing
size
Mounting
with
heating
Deep groove ball

bearing
Magneto bearing
Tapered
roller bearing
Angular contact
ball bearing
Spindle bearing
Barrel roller
bearing
Four-point bearing
Spherical
roller bearing
cylindrical
medium
large
Self-aligning
ball bearing
Cylindrical roller bearing
small
cylindrical
small
Needle roller bearing

medium
large
Thrust ball bearing
cylindrical
small
Angular contact thrust ball bearing

medium
Cylindrical roller thrust bearing
Spherical roller thrust bearing
Self-aligning ball bearing

Self-aligning ball bearing
with adapter sleeve
large
tapered
Barrel roller bearing

Barrel roller bearing with adapter sleeve
medium
Spherical roller bearing

Spherical roller bearing with adapter sleeve
Spherical roller bearing with withdrawal
sleeve
Withdrawal
Adapter sleeve
sleeve
Cylindrical roller bearing, double row
small
large
tapered
small
medium
large
FAG | 6
without
heating
ting
Dismounting
Hydraulic
method
with
heating
Symbols
without
heating
Hydraulic
method
Oil bath
Heating plate
Hot air
cabinet
Induction
heating device
Induction
coil
Heating ring
Hammer and
mounting sleeve
Mechanical and
hydraulic presses
Double hook
wrench
Nut and
hook wrench
Nut and
thrust bolts
Axle cap
Hydraulic nut
Hammer and
metal drift
Extractor
Hydraulic method
FAG | 7
1. Rolling Bearing Storage
1: Rolling bearing storage
a: Large bearings especially

should not be stored upright.
b: They should be stored flat and
supported over their entire circumference.
Leave bearings in their original

package
Store bearings in their original package in order to protect them

against contamination and corrosion. Open package only at the assembly site immediately prior to mounting.
Store larger bearings flat
Larger bearings with relatively thin-walled rings should not be stored

upright (Figure 1a) but flat and supported over their whole circumference (Figure 1b).
Prior to packing, FAG rolling bearings are dipped in anticorrisive oil.
This oil does not gum and harden and is compatible with all commercial rolling bearing greases. In their original package rolling bearings are safely protected against external influences.
Store bearings in dry rooms
During storage, the bearings must not be exposed to the effects of

aggresive media such as gases, mists or aerosols of acids, alkaline
solutions or salts. Direct sunlight should be avoided. The formation
of condensation water is avoided under the following conditions:
Temperatures + 6 to + 25 C,
for a short time 30 C
temperature difference day/night 8 K,
relative air humidity 65 %.
With standard preservation, bearings can be stored up to 5 years if
the said conditions are met.
If the permissible storage period is exceeded, it is recommended to
check the bearings for its preservation state and corrosion prior to
use. On request, FAG will help to judge the risk of longer storage or
use of older bearings.
Bearings with shields or seals on both sides should not be kept to
their very limit of storage time. The lubricating greases contained in
the bearings may change their chemico-physical behaviour due to
aging (see FAG catalogue WL 41 520).
FAG | 8
2. How to Prepare Rolling Bearings for

2.1 Work Planning
Prior to mounting and dismounting of rolling bearings, several preparatory steps should be taken.
Study the shop drawing to familiarize yourself with the design details
of the application and the assembly sequence. Phase the individual
operations and get reliable information on heating temperatures,
mounting and dismounting forces and the amount of grease to be
packed into the bearing.
Study shop drawing and phase

individual operations
Whenever rolling bearing mounting and dismounting require special

measures, the bearing serviceman should be provided with comprehensive instructions on mounting details, including means of transport for the bearing, mounting and dismounting equipment, measuring devices, heating facilities, type and quantity of lubricant.
2.2 The Right Bearing

Prior to mounting, the bearing serviceman must make sure that the
bearing number stamped on the package agrees with the designation given on the drawing and in the parts list. He should therefore be
familiar with the bearing numbering and identification system (see tables 7.1 and 7.2, pp. 83 to 85).
Compare inscription on package

with data on drawing
Standard bearings are identified by the bearing number listed in the

pertinent standards and rolling bearing catalogues. Its structure is a
system of numerals and letters. The first group in the system identifies the bearing type and diameter series, also the width series for
some bearings. The second group constitutes the bore reference
number; for bearings of 20 to 480 mm bore, the actual bore diameter
in millimetres is five times the bore reference number.
If operating conditions call for a bearing with special design features,
the required bearing characteristics are indicated by suffixes added
to the bearing number (see table 7.1, p. 83).
Non-standardized FAG bearings are identified by code numbers from
the 500 000 or 800 000 series.
9 | FAG
Preparations
2.3 Handling of Rolling Bearings before Mounting

FAG rolling bearings are preserved in their original package, with an
anticorrisive oil. The oil need not be washed out, when mounting the
bearing. In service, the oil combines with the bearing lubricant and
provides for sufficient lubrication in the run-in period.
Wipe clean seats and mating
surfaces of anticorrosive oil
The seats and mating surfaces must be wiped clean of anticorrisive

oil before mounting.
Wash out anticorrisive oil with cold-cleaning agent from tapered
bearing bores prior to mounting in order to ensure a safe and tight fit
on the shaft or sleeve. Then thinly coat the bore with a machine oil of
medium viscosity.
Wash out used and contaminated bearings
Prior to mounting, wash used and contaminated bearings carefully

with kerosene or cold-cleaning agent and oil or grease them immediately afterwards.
Do not rework rings
Do not perform any rework on the bearing. Subsequent drilling of lubrication holes, machining of grooves, flats and the like will disturb
the stress distribution in the ring resulting in premature bearing failure. There is also the risk of chips or grit entering the bearing.
2.4 Cleanliness in Mounting

Keep work area dust-free
and dry
Absolute cleanliness is essential! Dirt and humidity are dangerous offenders, since even the smallest particles penetrating into the bearing will damage the rolling surfaces. The work area must, therefore,
be dust-free, dry and well removed from machining operations.
Avoid cleaning with compressed air.
Wipe clean seats and mating

surfaces of anticorrosive oil
Ensure cleanliness of shaft, housing and any other mating parts. Castings must be free from sand. Bearing seats on shaft and in housing
should be carefully cleaned from anti-rust compounds and residual
paint. Turned parts must be free from burrs and sharp edges. After
cleaning, the housing bore should receive a protective coating.
FAG | 10
Preparations
2.5 Surrounding Parts

All surrounding parts should be carefully checked for dimensional
and form accuracy prior to assembly
Check mating parts for dimensional and form accuracy prior

to bearing mounting
Non-observance of the tolerances for shaft and housing seat diameters, out-of-roundness of these parts, out-of-square of abutment
shoulders etc. impair bearing performance and may lead to premature failure. The responsibility of such faults for bearing failure is not
always easy to establish and much time can be lost in looking for the
cause of failure.
2.6 Fits
Good bearing performance is largely dependent on adherence to the
fits specified for the rings in the drawing (see table 7.3 and 7.4, pp.
86 to 100).
Observe ring fits specified on

drawing
No one can give a straight answer to the question of the "right" fit; indeed the selection of fits is determined by the operating conditions
of the machine and the design characteristics of the bearing assembly. Basically, both rings should be well supported over their seating
areas and should therefore be tight fits. This is, however, not always
possible, since it makes mounting and dismounting more difficult and
is unfeasible with applications calling for easy axial displacement of
one ring, for instance with floating bearings.
The interference produced by tight fits expands the inner ring and
contracts the outer ring resulting in a reduction of radial clearance.
Therefore, the radial clearance should be adapted to the fits.
The shaft and housing tolerances should be checked. Too loose a fit
causes the ring to creep on the shaft which tends to damage both ring
and shaft. It also affects the working accuracy of the machine or causes premature raceway fatigue from poor support. On the other hand,
too tight a fit may result in detrimental preload and hot running of the
bearing.
As the walls of rolling bearing rings are relatively thin, possible poor
geometry of the mating parts is transmitted to the raceways. The
seats must therefore be checked for diameter and form tolerances.
For cylindrical seats, cylindricity is checked (DIN ISO 1101). For tapered seats, roundness (DIN ISO 1101), taper angle and straightness
(DIN 7178) are checked.
The seating surfaces of shaft and housing smoothen, when joined,
the bearing surfaces usually to a lesser degree. The rougher the surfaces, the more marked is the loss in interference. Therefore, the
roughness of the bearings seats (DIN 4768) is also checked.
Check shaft and housing tolerances
Check form tolerance of shaft

and housing seats
Check roughness of bearing

seats
11 | FAG
Preparations
2.7 Inspection of Bearing Seats

For all measurements ensure that the measuring instrument has approximately the same temperature as the parts to be measured.
2.7.1 Cylindrical Seats
Shafts are generally checked with external micrometers (Fig. 2); The
measuring accuracy must be checked by calibration.
2: External micrometer for measuring shaft diameters
3: A snap gauge ensures safe positioning and perfect measurement

of cylindrical seats. The diameter
for setting the gauge is marked on
the master ring.
FAG | 12
Preparations
Another useful instrument is the snap gauge shown in fig. 3. It functions as a comparator and its correct setting is checked with master
rings. These master rings are supplied by FAG for each diameter.
Bores are checked with internal micrometers (Fig. 4).
Conventional comparative measuring instruments are also used
(Figs. 5 to 7).
4: Internal micrometer for bore

measurements
5: Comparative measuring instruments are especially suitable for

bore measurements. The master
ring is used for setting.
13 | FAG
Preparations
6: A housing bore is measured with

a bore measuring instrument.
7: Principle of the measurement

with a bore measuring instrument
(determination of the minimum dimension).
Check diameter and cylindricity

of shaft and housing seats
Shaft and housing seats are checked for their diameter and their cylindricity.
Normally, the diameter is measured in two different cross sections
and several planes (two-point measurement) (Figs. 8 and 9).
8, 9: Usually the cylindricity of

shaft and housing seats is
checked by measuring the diameter in two cross sections and several planes (two-point measurement).
FAG | 14
Preparations
Unless otherwise specified in the shop drawing, the cylindricity

tolerance should not exceed half the diameter tolerance (two-point
measurement).
According to DIN ISO 1101, the cylindricity tolerance refers to the radius. The tolerance values specified according to this standard must
therefore be doubled for two-point measurements.
2.7.2 Tapered Seats

Full inner ring support on the shaft requires exact coincidence of
shaft taper and inner ring bore taper.
The taper of rolling bearing rings is standardized. For most bearing
series it is 1:12, for some large width series 1:30.
The master taper ring (Fig. 10) is the simplest measuring device.
Conformity of shaft and master taper is ascertained by blueing. An
inadequate shaft taper must be improved, until the master ring shows
full width support. FAG supply master tapers for taper diameters from
25 to 150 mm.
Bearing inner rings should not be used as master rings.
For the exact checking of tapered shaft seats FAG developed the taper measuring instruments MGK 133 and MGK 132. The use of a reference taper or segment enables exact measurement of the bearing
seat taper and diameter. Both instruments are easy to handle; the
workpiece to be measured need not be removed from the machine.
Do not use bearing inner rings

as master taper rings
Use FAG taper measuring instruments MGK 133 and MGK 132
for exact checking
10: Master taper ring for checking

small tapered bearing seats
15 | FAG
Preparations
11: Taper measuring instrument

FAG MGK 133 for tapers with outside diameters of 27 to 205 mm
and lengths of less than 80 mm
The taper measuring instrument FAG MGK 133 is provided for tapers
of less than 80 mm length (Fig. 11).
Measuring Ranges
Taper measuring
instrument
MGK
133A
MGK
133B
MGK
133C
Taper dia. [mm]
27...47
47...67
67...87
Taper
FAG | 16
MGK
133D
MGK
133E
MGK
133F
MGK
133G
87...115 115...145 145...175 175...205
Taper 1:12 and 1:30 (other angles on request)
Min. taper
length
[mm]
17
21
28
34
42
52
65
Dist. betw. meas.

planes
[mm]
12
15
20
25
33
45
58
Preparations
12: Taper measuring instrument

FAG MGK 132 for tapers with outside diameters of 90 to 820 mm
and lengths of more than 80 mm
The taper measuring instrument FAG MGK 132 is used for tapers of a
minimum length of 80 mm and a minimum diameter of 90 mm (Fig. 12).
Measuring Ranges
Taper measuring
instrument
MGK
132B
MGK
132C
MGK
132D
MGK
132E
MGK
132F
Taper dia. [mm]
90...210
190...310
290...410
390...510
490...820
Taper
Taper 1:12 and 1:30 (other angles on request)
Min. taper
length
[mm]
80
80
110
125
140
Dist. betw. meas.

planes
[mm]
20
20
25
30
36
17 | FAG
3. Rolling Bearing Mounting
The various bearing types and sizes require different mounting methods. Depending on the individual conditions these can be mechanical, hydraulic or thermal.
Do not subject bearing rings to
hammer blows
As the hardened bearing rings are sensitive to blows, these must never be applied directly to the rings.
For non-separable bearings apply mounting force directly to

the ring to be mounted
On mounting of non-separable bearings (Fig. 13), the mounting forces must always be applied to the ring which will have the tight fit and
therefore is the first to be mounted. Forces applied to the ring with
the loose fit would be transmitted by the rolling elements, thus damaging raceways and rolling elements.
Mounting of separable bearings (Fig. 14) is easier, since the two rings
can be mounted separately. In order to avoid score marks during assembly, slightly rotate the parts.
13: If a tight fit is required for the

inner ring of a non-separable
bearing, the bearing will first be
mounted on the shaft; then the
shaft and bearing assembly is
pushed into the housing.
14: With separable bearings the

rings can be mounted independently. This is especially advantageous when both rings get a tight
fit. In order to avoid score marks,
slightly rotate the parts when
installing inner ring and shaft into
outer ring and housing.
13
14
3.1 Mechanical Methods

3.1.1 Mounting of Cylindrical Bore Bearings
Bearings with a maximum bore of approximately 80 mm can be
mounted cold. The use of a mechanical or hydraulic press is recommended (Fig. 15).
FAG | 18
Mounting
15: Bearings with a max. bore of

80 mm can be mounted on the
shaft with a hydraulic press.
If no press is available, the bearing can be driven on the shaft by gentle taps with a hammer or mallet. However, a mounting sleeve of soft
steel and with a flat face must be used in order to distribute the mounting force evenly over the entire ring circumference and to avoid damage to the bearing (Fig. 16).
16: If necessary, small bearings

can be driven on the shaft with
gentle hammer taps, using an appropriate mounting sleeve.
The inside diameter of the sleeve should just be little larger than the
bearing bore and, to avoid damage to the cage, its outside diameter
should not exceed the inner ring shoulder height.
If a self-aligning bearing has to be pressed on the shaft and pushed
into the housing at the same time, a disk should be used which bears
against both bearing rings, thus avoiding misalignment of the outer
ring in the housing (Fig. 17).
19 | FAG
Mounting
17: Simultaneous shaft and housing assembly of a bearing with the

aid of a mounting disk.
18: For some self-aligning ball

bearings, the mounting disk must
be relieved.
17
18
In some self-aligning ball bearings, the balls protrude beyond the

rings. In such cases, the disk must be relieved (Fig. 18).
Heat also small bearings to
achieve heavy interference fits
If very tight fits are required, even small bearings should be heated
for mounting, chapter 3.2.
With light metal housings the seating areas might be damaged by
press-fitting the outer ring in the housing bore. In such cases, the
housing should be heated or the bearing cooled.
19: The outer rings of large cylindrical roller bearings are positioned
by means of a mounting lever.
19
Heavy bearing outer rings with sliding fit can be mounted with a
mounting lever (Fig. 19).
In order to avoid damage to the raceway and roller surfaces the end
of the mounting lever should be wrapped with cloths (do not use cotton waste).
FAG | 20
Mounting
Mounting of Needle Roller Bearings

Needle Roller Bearings with Machined Rings
The same mounting principles apply to needle roller bearings as to
cylindrical roller bearings. Bearings mounted in groups must have the
same radial clearance to ensure uniform load distribution.
Drawn Cup Needle Roller Bearings
Due to their thin outer rings the form accuracy for the drawn cup
needle roller bearings is achieved by means of tight fits in the housing, making a lateral location unnecessary.
For mounting drawn cup needle roller bearings, special mounting
mandrels are used. Usually the mandrel abuts the stamped bearing
face which is hardened with smaller sizes. If the mounting mandrel is
accurately dimensioned, it can be applied to an unhardened lip without deforming or jamming the needle roller and cage assembly (Figs.
20 and 21).
Drawn cup needle roller bearings

are pressed into the housing with
a mounting mandrel.
20: Drawn cup needle roller bearing, open ends
20
21
21: Drawn cup needle roller bearing, closed end
21 | FAG
Mounting
Needle Roller and Cage Assemblies

Needle roller and cage assemblies are mounted between shaft and
housing. In order to avoid score marks on the raceways and needle
rollers, the needle roller and cage assemblies should be slightly
turned and remain unloaded on mounting.
Needle roller and cage assemblies can be axially guided in the housing or on the shaft (Fig. 22).
The distance between the lateral cage guiding surfaces must be large
enough (tolerance H11) to prevent the needle roller and cage assembly
from jamming.
The radial clearance of needle roller and cage assemblies depends
on the machining tolerances of the hardened and ground raceways
on the shaft and in the housing. Needle roller and cage assemblies
mounted in groups must be fitted with needle rollers of the same tolerance group.
22: Needle roller and cage assemblies can be guided in the housing
or on the shaft.
a: Guidance in the housing
b: Guidance on the shaft
Combined Needle Roller Bearings

The tight fits for the combined needle roller bearings require relatively high mounting forces. This must be borne in mind especially for
needle roller-thrust ball bearings and needle roller-cylindrical roller
thrust bearings with dust shield, where the ball or roller assembly of
the thrust bearing is non-separable. It is advantageous to heat the
housings for pressing-in these bearings.
FAG | 22
Mounting
23: Combined needle roller - thrust

ball bearings and needle roller cylindrical roller thrust bearings
with dust shield must be pressed
into the housing.
a: Needle roller - thrust ball bearing
b: Needle roller - cylindrical roller
thrust bearing
Yoke Type Track Rollers

Since, in most cases, the inner ring of yoke type track rollers is subjected to point load, a tight fit on the shaft is not required. On mounting, ensure that the lubricating hole is located in the unloaded raceway zone. The outer ring of yoke type track rollers without axial guidance must be guided by lateral backing surfaces.
24: On mounting yoke type track

rollers, the lubricating hole must be
located in the unloaded zone of
the raceway. The outer rings of
yoke type track rollers without
axial guidance must be guided by
lateral backing surfaces.
Stud Type Track Rollers

On mounting stud type track rollers, the radial lubricating hole should
be located in the unloaded zone of the raceway.
On mounting a stud type track roller in the through-hole of a machine
frame, the stud must usually be secured against rotating when
tightening the nut. This is enabled by a slot at the flanged end of the
stud (Fig. 25).
23 | FAG
Mounting
25: Rotation of the stud during

tightening of a stud type track roller is prevented by the slot at the
flanged end of the stud.
When a stud type track roller is screwed into a blind hole, the tightening torque must be applied through the slot. For this purpose, an
appropriate tool is required (Fig. 26). About 75% of the tightening
torques listed in the catalogues can be safely applied with these tools.
26: The stud of a stud type track

roller can be screwed into a blind
hole with special tools.
3.1.2 Mounting of Tapered Bore Bearings

Bearings with tapered bore are either fitted directly on the tapered
shaft journal or, if the shaft is cylindrical, on an adapter sleeve or a
withdrawal sleeve.
Apply just a thin oil film to
washed out bearing bore and
seats on shaft and sleeve
The oil film applied to the washed out bearing bore, shaft and sleeve
should be very thin. A heavier coating would reduce friction and thus
ease mounting; however, in operation the lubricant would be gradually forced out from the joint with a slackening effect on the tight fit,
causing the ring or sleeve to creep and corrosion to develop on the
surfaces.
Forcing the bearing onto the tapered seat expands the inner ring and
reduces radial clearance. Therefore the reduction in radial clearance
can be used as a measure of the seating condition of the inner ring.
FAG | 24
Mounting
The reduction in radial clearance is the difference between the radial

clearance prior to mounting and the radial clearance after bearing
mounting. It is necessary to determine the initial radial clearance before mounting and then to check the clearance repeatedly during
mounting until the proper amount of reduction and thus the required
tight fit are obtained.
Instead of measuring the reduction in radial clearance the distance
the bearing is forced onto the tapered seat can be measured. For the
standard inner ring bore taper of 1:12 the ratio of axial drive-up to radial clearance reduction is approximately 15:1. This ratio considers
the fact that the expansion of the inner ring is more than 75 to 80%
of the amount of interference existing between the fitted parts.
Check radial clearance

reduction, drive-up distance
or expansion
If, with small bearings, the exact axial drive-up cannot be measured,
the bearing should be mounted outside the housing. The bearing
should be driven up the tapered seat just enough to still turn smoothly and to allow the outer ring to be easily swivelled by hand. The serviceman must have a "touch" for the smooth running feature.
The radial clearance reduction, the axial drive-up distance or the expansion should also be measured, when a bearing is being refitted.
Special attention should be given to the locknut, the position of which
may have changed due to the broaching effect in the seating areas
and the settling of the threads. The values for the recommended reduction of radial clearance are listed in the appendix (tables 7.21 and
7.22, pp. 111 and 112).
The radial clearance is measured with feeler gauges (Fig. 27).

reduction, drive-up distance
or expansion also during
reassembly

with feeler gauges
In case of spherical roller bearings, the clearance must be measured

simultaneously over both rows of rollers (Fig. 28). Identity of clearance values, such as measured over both rows of rollers, ensures that
there is no lateral offset of the inner ring relative to the outer ring.
Aligning of the ring faces alone is, because of the width tolerances of
the rings, no guarantee against such an offset position.
27: measuring radial clearance

with feeler gauges before
mounting
27
28
28: For spherical roller bearings,

the radial clearance must be
measured simultaneously over
both rows of rollers.
25 | FAG
Mounting
Check inner ring expansion of

separable bearings
Cylindrical roller bearings offer the advantage of separate installation

of inner and outer rings; the inner ring expansion can be measured by means of an external micrometer - instead of the reduction of
radial clearance (Fig. 29).
29: Measuring the expansion of a

cylindrical roller bearing inner ring
with an external micrometer
Mechanical and hydraulic equipment is available to pressfit the bearing on its tapered seat or to press a sleeve in place. Which method is
the best to a given application depends on the mounting conditions.
Mount small bearings with

shaft nut and hook spanner
Press fit small and medium-size bearings with shaft nut on the tapered seat (Fig. 30). Tighten nut with hook spanner.
The adapter sleeve nut and hook spanner are used for driving small
bearings onto the tapered seat of the sleeve (Fig. 31).
Shaft nuts are also used to press small withdrawal sleeves into the
space between shaft and bearing inner ring (Fig. 32).
FAG | 26
Mounting
30: Press-fitting a spherical roller

bearing with a shaft nut
30
31
31: Press-fitting an adapter sleeve

mounted spherical roller bearing
with the adapter sleeve nut
Double hook spanners

The double hook spanner sets FAG 173556 and 173557 are used for
mounting self-aligning ball bearings onto adapter sleeves. Both sets
include torque wrenches for more exactly determining the starting
position before the bearing is driven onto the shaft.
On every double hook spanner there are rotation angles engraved for
the self-aligning ball bearings that have to be mounted by means of
these spanners so that the drive-up distance and radial clearance reduction can be adjusted accurately (Fig. 33).
32: Press-fitting a withdrawal sleeve

with the shaft nut
32
33
33: Double hook spanner with engraved rotation angles for fitting
self-aligning ball bearings
27 | FAG
Mounting
34: Mounting nuts with thrust bolts

facilitate mounting of large withdrawal sleeves. Between nut and
sleeve a ring is inserted.
For larger bearings, considerable forces are required to tighten the

nut. In such cases, the mounting nut with thrust bolts shown in Fig.
34 facilitates mounting.
To avoid tilting of the bearing or sleeve, the mounting nut should just
be tightened enough to make nut and ring bear flush against their mating part. Then the thrust bolts of hardened steel, evenly spaced around
the circumference of the nut, - their number depending on the forces
required - are diagonally tightened, until the required reduction in
radial clearance is obtained.
As the taper connection is self-locking, the mounting nut can then be
removed and be replaced by the locknut. The procedure can also be
applied to bearings mounted on an adapter sleeve or directly on the
tapered journal.
Use FAG hydraulic nuts for
mounting of larger bearings
When mounting larger bearings, it may be advisable to use a hydraulic press. Figs. 35 and 36 show how a spherical roller bearing is
being press-fitted with the aid of a hydraulic nut 1). Hydraulic nuts are
available for all regular sleeve and shaft threads. The hydraulic pro-
1)
35: Hydraulic nut for mounting

tapered bore bearings on a
tapered shaft
FAG | 28
See FAG Hydraulic Nuts, Publ. No. WL 80 103 for nomenclature and dimensions.
Mounting
36: Mounting of a spherical roller

bearing with an annular piston
press.
a: Mounting on an adapter sleeve
b: Press fitting of a withdrawal
sleeve
cedure described in chapters 3.3 and 4.3 is another valuable mounting and particularly dismounting aid.
3.2 Thermal Methods

If tight fits are specified for the inner rings on cylindrical shaft seats,
the bearings are heated for mounting. Sufficient expansion is obtained when heated between 80 and 100C. Accurate temperature
control is essential in heating the bearings. If the temperature exceeds
120C there is the risk of alteration of bearing grain structure resulting in a drop of hardness and dimensional instability.
For bearings with moulded cages of glass fibre reinforced polyamide
the same temperature limits are valid as for the other rolling bearings.
Bearings with shields (Fig. 37a) and with seals (Fig. 37b) are packed
with grease during manufacture. They can be heated up to 80C maximum, but never in an oil bath.
37: Never heat bearings with

shields or seals in an oil bath. The
maximum heating temperature is
80C.
a: Bearing with shields
b: Bearing with seals
29 | FAG
Mounting
38: A ring is inserted between a

heating plate without thermostatic
control and the inner ring of an E
spherical roller bearing with polyamide cage.
3.2.1 Heating Plate

Provisionally, rolling bearings can be heated on a heating plate which
should be thermostatically controlled. Turn the bearing over several
times in order to ensure uniform heating.
If the temperature of a heating plate without thermostatic control exceeds 120C, polyamide cages must not contact the heating plate.
This can be avoided by inserting a ring between the plate and the
bearing inner ring (Fig. 38).
3.2.2 Oil Bath
For uniform heating, rolling bearings are generally immersed in an oil
bath which is thermostatically controlled to a temperature of 80 to
100C. The bearing should not be in direct contact with the heat source.
The best arrangement is to have a screen several inches off the bottom of the oil tank which will prevent uneven heating of the bearing
and protect it from contaminants settling on the tank bottom (Fig. 39).
The bearings may also be suspended in the oil bath (Fig. 40). After
heating, any oil adhering to the bearing should be well drained off and
the fitting surfaces should be carefully wiped clean.
39, 40: Heating in an oil bath

ensures uniform heating of the
bearings: A temperature of
80 to 100C can be easily
controlled. Disadvantage: Risk
of contamination.
39: Heating a deep groove ball
bearing in an oil bath
40: Heating cylindrical roller bearing inner rings in oil bath
FAG | 30
39
40
Mounting
Mounting of heated rings or bearings requires some skill (Fig. 41). The
parts should be rapidly pushed on the shaft and positioned squarely
against the shoulder. A slight twisting motion during fitting facilitates
the work. It is advisable to use heat-protective gloves or non-fraying
cloths, but never cotton waste.
Heat larger bearings for mounting
Do not use cotton waste in

mounting work
Larger bearings are generally transported with a crane. In this case

the bearing is suspensed in mounting grippers (Fig. 42) or in a rope
sling. Working with the rope sling is not easy. Ensure alignment of ring
and shaft in order to prevent tilting.
41: Heated bearing parts are rapidly pushed on the shaft and positioned squarely against the
shoulder. This is facilitated by a
slight twisting motion.
31 | FAG
Mounting
42: Mounting grippers
Provide for immediate axial

location of mounted ring
When positioning, the inner ring should be immediately held tight

against the shaft shoulder, until it has cooled down to avoid any clearance between ring face and shoulder after cooling. This also applies
to a pair of rings mounted side by side.
3.2.3 Hot Air Cabinet
A safe and clean method of heating rolling bearings is by use of a hot
air cabinet. Thermostat regulation enables accurate temperature
control. Careful operation excludes contamination of the bearings.
However, heating the bearings in hot air takes considerable time, therefore adequately dimensioned hot air cabinets should be provided for
bath mounting.
3.2.4 Induction Heating Device*)
With the FAG induction heating devices A45EA020DV220 (Fig. 43)
and A45EA110 (Fig. 44) rolling bearings are brought up to mounting
temperature in a fast, secure and clean manner. The devices can be
used for any rolling bearing types including greased and sealed bearings. They operate on the transformer principle. Power supply is low.
The devices can be connected to a socket of 220V/50 Hz or 60 Hz;
maximum amperage is 16 A (device A45EA020 V110: 110 V/50 Hz or
60 Hz).
The heating device is suitable for rolling bearings of a minimum bore
diameter of 20 mm. The weight can be up to 40 kg.**)
The device can also be used to heat other ring-shaped steel parts
such as shrink rings or labyrinth rings.
After heating, the parts are automatically demagnetized.
*) For details see publication: "Induction Heating Device for Rolling Bearings FAG
A45EA020DV220", Publ. No. WL 80132.
**) Parts having a weight of up to 250 kg can be heated with the induction heating device
FAG A45EA110, see Publ. No. WL 80 126.
FAG | 32
Mounting
43,44: The induction heating

devices ensure fast, clean and
secure heating up to mounting
temperature.
43: FAG A45EA020DV220
44: FAG A45EA110
33 | FAG
Mounting
45: Induction coil for 380 V with

bearing inner ring
3.2.5 Induction Coil*)

Induction coils heat the inner rings of cylindrical roller and needle roller bearings of 100 mm bore onward.
The induction coils shown in this chapter can be used for both mounting and dismounting. They are, however, mainly used for ring withdrawal (chapter 4.2.2). Since heating for dismounting tight-fitted inner rings is very fast, the amount of heat transferred to the shaft is minimized so that the rings such as axle box roller bearings in rail vehicles, or for frequent dismounting and remounting of large-size bearings, as is the case for roll exchange in rolling mills.
FAG induction coils can be connected between two phases to the
common three-phase current mains (50 or 60 Hz). For heating inner
rings of a bore up to approximately 200 mm, coils are used which are
connected directly to the 380 V mains (Fig. 45). For larger bearings
the harmless low voltage equipment with 20 to 40 V at 50 Hz (60 Hz)
should be used.
Low voltage induction coils are connected to the mains (380 V) via
transformer (Fig. 46). The water-cooled winding provides for a better
efficiency, easier handling and lower weight of the device.
*) For details see Publ. No. WL 80107 EA "FAG Induction Heating Equipment".
FAG | 34
Mounting
46: Low-voltage induction coil with

transformer EFB 125/1, for cylindrical roller bearing inner rings of
635 mm bore
Ring weight:
390 kg
Approx. coil weight:
70 kg
46
47
When the induction coils are used for mounting work, ensure that the
rings are not overheated. The heatup times are indicated in the operating instructions.
47: Demagnetization of the inner

ring of a cylindrical roller bearing
by means of the induction coil
See operating instructions for

heatup times
The operating instructions also describe the use of the coil for demagnetization of the bearing rings upon completion of induction heating (Fig. 47).
3.2.6 Cooling
For a tight fit of the outer ring, the housing is heated in most cases to
mounting temperature. With large and bulky housings, this may cause
problems. In this case, the rolling bearing is cooled in a mixture of dry
ice and alcohol. The temperature should not drop below -50C.
Never cool bearings below -50C
The condensation water resulting from temperature equalization

must be completely rinsed out of the bearing with oil in order to prevent corrosion.
35 | FAG
Mounting
48: Principle of hydraulic mounting; fluid film buildup between the

mating surfaces.
3.3 Hydraulic Method

With the hydraulic method, oil is injected between the mating surfaces. This may be machine oil, or oil containing rust dissolving additives. The oil film greatly reduces the friction between the mating parts
which can then be easily displaced in relation to one another without
the risk of surface damage. Fretting corrosion can be dissolved by
means of kerosene or rust-dissolving additives to the oil.
Tapered bore bearings can be mounted on, and dismounted from,
their tapered counterpart by the hydraulic method. Cylindrical bore
bearings or sleeves are heated for mounting, whilst dismounting is
performed hydraulically. For oil injection, oil grooves, feed channels
and threaded connections for the pump are machined into shaft or
the sleeve (Figs. 49, 50). See FAG publication WL 80 102 EA "How to
Mount and Dismount Rolling Bearings Hydraulically" for technical
details.
Hydraulic mounting of tapered bore bearings which are directly fitted
on the tapered shaft end, requires but a small amount of oil. Simple,
low feed injectors are therefore satisfactory (Fig. 51). FAG supply two
sizes of oil injectors with connecting threads G 3/8 and G 3/4. The
smaller oil injector is good for shaft diameters up to 80 mm, the larger for diameter up to 150 mm.
49: Position of the oil groove for a
tapered bore bearing
FAG | 36
Mounting
50: Larger adapter and withdrawal

sleeves feature oil grooves and oil
collecting grooves.
a: Adapter sleeve, design HG
b: Withdrawal sleeve, design H
b
51: Oil injector and valve nipple for
connecting thread G 3/8:
Injector:
FAG No. 107640
Nipple:
FAG No. 107642
for connecting thread G 3/4:
Injector:
FAG No. 107641
Nipple:
FAG No. 107643
It is different with cylindrical bore bearings and with adapter and withdrawal sleeves. Here, the oil loss occurring at the edges of the mating surfaces must be compensated by a higher rate of oil feed. This
is achieved by an oil pump (Figs. 52 to 54).
The fluid used is a machine oil of medium viscosity. Mounting work
should be performed with an oil having a viscosity of about 75 mm2/s
at 20C (nominal viscosity 32 mm2/s at 40C).
52: Hand pump set FAG 173746,

consisting of a two-step piston
pump (800 bar) with 3-litre oil container, manometer, extreme pressure hose and fitting (connecting
thread G 1/4)
37 | FAG
Mounting

pump (800 bar), with 3-litre oil container, manometer, 2 extreme pressure hoses and fittings (connecting
thread G 1/4)

pump (1500 bar), with 3-litre oil
container, manometer, extreme
pressure hose and fitting (connecting thread G 1/4)
Mounting of Tapered Bore Bearings

Use shaft nut, thrust bolts or
FAG hydraulic nut for mounting
55: Hydraulic connection of a withdrawal sleeve
FAG | 38
The bearing is pressed into position by a shaft nut, thrust bolts or the
FAG hydraulic nut (see Fig. 35). Hydraulic withdrawal sleeves and adapter sleeves are provided with threaded oil bore connections M6, M8,
G 1/8, G 1/4, depending on sleeve size (see FAG Publ. No. WL 80200/3).
The pumps shown in Figs. 52 to 54 feature an extreme pressure hose
and are connected to the sleeve by reducing socket R, ERMETO tube
E1 and steel pipe S (Fig. 55).
Mounting
56: Mounting of a tapered bore

spherical roller bearing by the hydraulic method
For mounting, oil is pumped between the mating surfaces. The axial
forces required for mounting are applied through six or eight bolts located in the shaft nut or the adapter sleeve nut (Figs. 56 to 59).
A spacer between the bolts and the sleeve or bearing ring prevents
damage to the latter. When pressing in a withdrawal sleeve as shown
in Fig. 58, the pipe for the hydraulic fluid passes through the shaft nut.
The amount of axial drive-up of the bearing or the withdrawal sleeve
depends on the required reduction of radial clearance (tables 7.21
and 7.22, pages 111 and 112). The bearing must not, of course, be
under oil pressure, when the radial clearance is being measured.
After relieving the oil pressure, the bearing is still kept under axial preload. Wait for 10 to 30 minutes, until oil has completely drained off
from the fitting surfaces. As a final step, the mounting device (nut with
thrust bolts or hydraulic nut) is removed and the shaft or sleeve nut
put in place and locked.
Relieve bearing of oil pressure

prior to measuring radial clearance
Keep bearing under axial preload for 10 to 30 minutes after
relief of the oil pressure
39 | FAG
Mounting
57: Bearing seated on shaft: The

oil is pumped between the mating
surfaces; at the same time pressure from bolts or a nut drives the
bearing up the tapered journal. The
reduction in radial clearance or the
axial drive-up distance is measured.
58: Bearing seated on withdrawal

sleeve: The oil is pumped between
the mating surfaces. The sleeve is
pressed into the bearing bore with
bolts and the reduction in radial
clearance is measured.
57
58
59a
59b
59: Bearing seated on adapter

sleeve: The oil is pumped between
the mating surfaces. Bolts drive
the bearing up the sleeve and the
radial clearance reduction is measured.
a: Oil bore in small end of sleeve
b: Oil bore in large end of sleeve
3.4 Clearance Adjustment on Mounting

3.4.1 Angular Contact Ball Bearings and Tapered Roller Bearings
Angular contact ball bearings and tapered roller bearings are always
mounted in pairs. The axial and radial clearance of two bearings
mounted in opposition is adjusted on mounting, the clearance or preload depending on the operating conditions. Angular contact ball
bearings of universal design can be mounted in pairs or groups in any
arrangement.
High loads and high speeds cause a temperature rise at the bearing
location. This leads to thermal expansion and clearance variation.
The type of clearance variation, i. e. an increase or a decrease, depends on arrangement and size of the bearings, the shaft and housing material and on bearing centre distance.
If close shaft guidance is required, the clearance is adjusted by stages. Each adjustment should be followed by a trial run and a temperature check. Thus, it is ensured that the clearance does not become
too small, resulting in a higher running temperature.
FAG | 40
Mounting
A welcome effect of trial runs is that the whole bearing mounting

"settles" and that, afterwards, the clearance practically remains stable (see also page 51).
A high speeds, adjust axial

clearance by stages
The right temperature for a bearing, operating in the medium to high

speed range under medium load, can, indicatively, be defined as follows: In the absence of extraneous heat, a correctly adjusted bearing
is allowed to attain, during the trial runs, a temperature of about 60 to
70C. After 2 or 3 hours running, this temperature should, however,
drop, especially when in the case of grease lubrication, the churning
action diminishes, after the excess grease is expelled from the bearing interior.
Bearings exposed to vibration at low speeds are mounted with zero
clearance or even preloaded to avoid the risk of the balls or rollers brinelling the raceways. Angular contact ball bearings and tapered roller bearings are adjusted against one another by nuts on the shaft
(Fig. 60), by shims (Fig. 61) or threated rings in the housing.
Provide for zero-clearance or

preload of a bearing exposed to
vibration at low speeds
Axial clearance or preload of adjustable bearings is established by

loosening or tightening the adjusting nut or by the insertion of calibrated shims. From the thread pitch, axial clearance and preload can
be converted into turns of the adjusting nut.
60: Adjustment of tapered roller

bearings of a loose wheel with the
shaft nut
60
61
61: Axial location of paired angular

contact ball bearings; clearance
adjustment with shim
41 | FAG
Mounting
The changeover from clearance to preload during adjustment is

found by constant manual rotation of the shaft. Simultaneously, a dial
gauge is applied to check the axial freedom of the shaft.
Adjust with torque wrench
A simpler method for correct bearing adjustment is the use of a torque

wrench. The adjusting nut is tightened to the appropriate torque
(e. g. for passenger car front wheel bearings 30 or 50 Nm. The right
torque is determined in tests; the values are specified in the repair instructions).
Loosening of the nut by approximately 1/12th of a turn provides for
the required clearance. In tapered roller bearings, the rollers should
bear against the cone back face rib during assembly. If the rollers
were to contact the rib only after mounting is completed, i. e. when
the bearing should therefore be alternatively turned in both directions
during mounting.
In matched, multi row tapered roller bearings (Figs. 62 and 63), the
axial clearance is a function of the spacer width. To determine distance "a" FAG developed the measuring devices of series MGS 155.
Details are gladly supplied on request.
62: Matched tapered roller

bearings in X arrangement
(suffix N11CA)
63: Double row tapered roller

bearing in O arrangement
FAG | 42
Mounting
Example:
Installation and adjustment of tapered roller bearings in the wheel
hubs of motor vehicles (Fig. 64).
64: Passenger car front wheel with

adjusted tapered roller bearings
43 | FAG
Mounting
Proceed as follows:
1. Clean hub and carefully remove any chips and burrs.
2. Apply thin oil film to bearing seats. Press the two cups in place with
a die. Make sure the die contacts only the cup face. Take care that
the cup faces fit well against the hub shoulders (Fig. 65).
3. Grease cone of inner bearing.
Pack grease also in the spaces between cage, cone, and rollers
(Fig. 66).
4. Insert cone into hub.
5. Press shaft seal ring into hub with sealing lip pointing towards
bearing.
6. Mount protective cap and spacer on the shaft. Make sure spacer
face has full support against shaft shoulder (Fig. 67).
7. Mount hub on shaft; make sure seal is not damaged.
65: Fitting of the bearing cup with

a die.
66: Pack roller/cage assembly of

tapered roller bearing with grease
65
66
67: After the protective cap, the

spacer is mounted on the shaft.
68: Tighten castle nut while rotating the wheel, until drag is felt.
Back off castle nut by 1/12 turn at
the most, until alignment with next
cotter pin hole is obtained and fit
cotter pin
FAG | 44
30=1/12 turn
67
68
Mounting
8. Apply grease well to cone of outside bearing and mount on shaft.

9. Mount safety plate.
10. Fit castle nut.
11. Tighten castle nut while the wheel is being rotated until drag is
felt (use torque wrench, if possible; follow repair instructions).
12. Back off castle nut approximately 1/12 turn, until alignment with
the next cotter pin hole is obtained and fit cotter pin (Fig. 68).
13. Check bearing for running smoothness and wobble. The wheel
must not drag, but rotate freely. Be sure the wheel does not wobble. If necessary, change safety plate or nut. If the illustrated dial
gauge (Fig. 69) is available, check axial clearance. 0 to 0.05 mm
are optimum values.
14. Mount cover.
15. Perform test run to check for change of bearing clearance. Readjust, if necessary.
69: Measurement of axial

clearance
45 | FAG
Mounting
70: Zero clearance double direction thrust ball bearing
71: Cylindrical roller thrust bearing

preloaded with shim S
70
71
This is a field-proven method of adjusting wheel bearings requiring

no special tools. There are other methods which, however, necessitate mounting tools and measuring instruments. They are primarily
intended for batch mounting.
3.4.2 Thrust Bearings

With thrust bearings, the shaft washers are generally transition fits,
tight fits being the exception. The housing washers are always loose
fits. The shaft washer of double direction thrust bearings should always be positively locked axially (Fig. 70). The mounting and dismounting of thrust bearings offers no difficulties.
3.4.3 Machine Tool Bearings

For machine tool spindles, the correct adjustment of bearing clearance
is of paramount importance because it controls the quality of the
machined workpieces. For correct adjustment, on mounting, of the
operating clearance or preload specified by the designer, FAG developed special measuring devices. These are used for today's widely
employed spindle bearing arrangements with double row cylindrical
roller bearings (Fig. 72). The correct preload of double direction
angular contact thrust ball bearings is automatically adjusted during
mounting.
The radial clearance of a mounted cylindrical roller bearing is equal
to the difference between the boundary circle diameter of the rollers,
and the raceway diameter of the lipless ring. For gauging the boundary circle, FAG supply the boundary circle measuring instruments
MGI 21 and MGA 31.
The raceway diameter of cylindrical roller bearings NNU49SK is measured with a snap gauge, the raceway diameter of series NN30ASK
with a plug gauge.
FAG | 46
Mounting
72: Bearing assembly of a fineboring spindle (work end). The radial

clearance of the double row cylindrical roller bearing is adjusted on
mounting.
FAG boundary circle measuring instruments are comparators allowing to measure the radial clearance within a measuring accuracy of
1 micron.
For precise adjustment of the radial clearance, the form accuracy of
the bearing seats, i. e. their roundness, cylindricity or taper, is important (also see p. 12 "Inspection of bearing seats").
Boundary Circle Measuring Instrument MGI 21
The radial clearance or preload of cylindrical roller bearings with separable inner ring (NNU49SK) is the difference between the diameter
of the circle under the rollers Hi and the raceway diameter F. The circle
under the rollers is the circle which contacts all rollers from inside,
when they are in contact with the outer ring raceway (Fig. 73).
The circle under the rollers is measured with the aid of the instrument
MGI21; the radial clearance of the mounted bearing can be determined together with a snap gauge (Fig. 74).
The two opposed steel segments of the boundary circle measuring
instrument form the measuring surfaces. The lower segment is stationary, the upper can be displaced; the movement being read from
the dial gauge.
47 | FAG
Mounting
73: Diameter under rollers Hi of

cylindrical roller bearings
NNU49SK (separable inner ring)
After having determined the boundary circle of the mounted outer

ring roller assembly, this value is transmitted to the snap gauge. During inner ring mounting on the tapered shaft seat, the expansion of
its raceway diameter is constantly checked with the aid of the snap
gauge. Positive values on the dial gauge indicate preload, negative
values indicate radial clearance; a zero value indicates a clearancefree bearing.
74: The measured diameter under

rollers is transmitted to the dial
indicator snap gauge. The boundary circle measuring instrument
FAG MGI 21 is used for cylindrical
roller bearings with separable inner
ring, such as FAG NNU49SK.
FAG | 48
Mounting
75: Diameter over rollers Ha of cylindrical roller bearings NN30ASK

(separable outer ring)
Boundary Circle Measuring Instrument MGA 31

The radial clearance or preload of cylindrical roller bearings with separable outer ring (NN30ASK) is the difference between the diameters
of the raceway E and the circle over the rollers Ha. The circle over the
rollers is the circle which circumscribes all rollers when they are in
contact with the inner ring raceway (Fig. 75).
76: The measured raceway

diameter is transmitted to the
boundary circle measuring
instrument with the aid of an
internal dial gauge. The boundary
circle measuring instrument FAG
MGA 31 is used for cylindrical
roller bearings with separable
outer ring, such as FAG NN30ASK.
49 | FAG
Mounting
The circle over the rollers is measured with the instrument MGA 31;
the radial clearance of the mounted bearing can thus be determined
together with an internal dial gauge (Fig. 76).
The two opposed steel segments of the boundary circle measuring
instrument form the measuring surfaces. One segment is stationary;
the other can be displaced. The movement can be read from the dial
gauge.
During measuring, the bearing outer ring has to be mounted in the
housing. After having determined the outer ring raceway diameter
with the aid of an internal dial gauge, this value is transmitted to the
boundary circle measuring instrument.
During mounting, the inner ring with cage and roller assembly is pushed
onto the tapered shaft seat until positive contact is established. The
boundary circle measuring instrument is applied and the inner ring
driven onto the taper seat, until the dial gauge indicates the required
value.
Positive values indicate preload, negative values indicate radial clearance; a zero value indicates a clearance-free bearing.
The Steady-State Temperature as a Means of Clearance Control

In the case of high-speed spindles, the operating clearance or preload can be verified from the bearing temperature registered during
trial runs.
Sensors should contact

bearing rings
77: Arrangement of heat sensors
FAG | 50
For temperature control, the bearing housing must be provided with

bores for the insertion of temperature sensors (Fig. 77). These bores
should be drilled prior to bearing installation. To obtain the true bearing temperature, the sensors must be in direct contact with the bearing rings. Controlling merely the temperature of the cylindrical roller
bearing will not do; the temperature of the preloaded angular contact
thrust ball bearing should also be measured.
4. Rolling Bearing Dismounting
The trial run should be long enough to allow the operating temperature to come to a steady state; this will happen after half an hour to
three hours depending on machine size. Steady-state temperatures
from 50 to 60C are acceptable, when the spindle operates at its top
speed; experience has shown that at this temperature bearing clearance is optimum.
4. Rolling Bearing Dismounting

If the bearings are intended for re-use, dismounting must be performed most carefully; it is imperative that the extracting tool be applied
to the ring to be extracted to prevent the rolling elements from brinelling the raceways (Fig. 78a). In addition, thin-walled outer rings involve the risk of ring fracture (Fig. 78b).
Apply tool to the ring to be extracted
With non-seperable bearings, first withdraw the ring with sliding fit
from its seat and then dismount the tight-fitted ring. The force required for dismounting is generally higher than the mounting force,
since, as time passes, the ring becomes embedded on its seat. Even
with loose-fitted rings, fretting corrosion may make dismounting
work difficult.
78a: Wrong! Do not apply dismounting force through the rolling

elements, if you want to re-use the
bearing.
78 a
78 b
78b: If dismounting through the

rolling elements is unavoidable,
put a collar of unhardened steel
round the outer ring (thickness 1/4
greater than bearing cross section
height). This applies especially to
bearings with small cross section
height and small contact angle
(such as tapered roller and spherical roller bearings). The bearings
shall not be reused.
79: Start dismounting of nonseparable bearings with the loose-fitted

ring.
79
80
80: The ring of separable

bearings can be dismounted
separately.
51 | FAG
Dismounting
4.1 Mechanical Methods

4.1.1 Dismounting of Cylindrical Bore Bearings
Small bearings are usually dismounted with the aid of mechanical extracting devices (Figs. 81, 82) or hydraulic presses (Fig. 83). These are
applied either directly to the tight-fitted ring or to the mating parts,
such as the labyrinth ring.
81: Dismounting of a barrel roller

bearing with an extractor
82: Extracting devices for rolling

bearings
a: Extractor with puller arms for
split ring
b: Extractor with three adjustable
arms
82a
83: Dismounting is facilitated by
use of a press.
FAG | 52
82b
Dismounting
Provisionally, small bearings can be driven off their seat with a hammer and a metal drift (Fig. 84, right). The light hammer blows should
be applied evenly round the whole circumference of the tight-fitted
ring.
Dismounting is greatly facilitated, if extracting slots are provided so
that the extractor can be directly applied to the tight-fitted bearing
ring (Figs. 85, 86 and 87).
Provide extracting slots
84: Provisional bearing dismounting by hammering

left: wrong
right: correct
(use soft metal drift)
Do not subject the bearing rings

to hammer blows
85: Slots in the shaft shoulder to
apply bearing extractor
85
86
86: Bores for extraction nuts

87: Slots for bearing outer ring removal
53 | FAG
Dismounting
When the inner ring abuts the shaft shoulder and when no extracting
slots are provided, ball bearings, tapered roller bearings and cylindrical roller bearings can be dismounted with a special extractor. With
the ball bearing extractor (Figs. 88, 89c), the clamping piece inserted
in the extractor engages with finger-shaped extensions between the
balls at the inner ring raceway edge; with extractors for cylindrical
and tapered roller bearings the clamping piece engages behind the
rollers (Fig. 89a).
88: Ball bearing extractor with

clamping piece
89a: Collet for tapered roller bearings and cylindrical roller bearings
with separable outer rings/cups
89b: Collet for tapered roller bearings and N-type cylindrical roller
bearings with unseparable outer
rings (cups).
89c: Collet for deep groove ball
bearings
c
a
FAG | 54
Dismounting
The clamping piece forms part of a collet and is clamped against the
inner ring with a tapered clamping ring. The extraction force is generated by a spindle. This extractor enables bearings mounted in the
housing to be withdrawn from the shaft.
4.1.2 Dismounting of Tapered Bore Bearings

4.1.2.1 Dismounting of Adapter Sleeve Mounted Bearings
For dismounting bearings directly seated on the tapered shaft or an

adapter sleeve, loosen the locking device of the shaft or sleeve nut.
Loosen nut by an amount corresponding to the drive-up distance.
Drive inner ring off the adapter sleeve or tapered shaft seat by gentle
hammer taps, using a soft metal drift (Fig. 90) or, even better, a piece
of tubing (Fig. 91).
When a press is used, support the adapter sleeve or the loosened
adapter sleeve nut and withdraw the bearing from the sleeve.
90: Dismounting of a small, adapter

sleeve mounted spherical roller
bearing. The inner ring is driven off
the sleeve by means of a metal
drift.
91: Dismounting of an adapter

sleeve mounted self-aligning ball
bearing. The use of a piece of tubing prevents damage to the bearing.
55 | FAG
Dismounting
92: Hydraulic nut for dismounting

an adapter sleeve mounted
spherical roller bearing
Adapter sleeves can be released with a hydraulic nut provided the

bearing rests against an angular support ring. The nut should take
support on a plate or the like (Fig. 92).
4.1.2.2 Dismounting of Withdrawal Sleeve Mounted Bearings

Withdrawal sleeve mounted bearings are removed by means of the
extraction nut (Fig. 93a). For this purpose, the shaft nut must be removed. In difficult cases (for large-size bearings), extraction nuts with
additional thrust bolts can be used (Fig. 93b). A washer is inserted
between inner ring and thrust bolts.
Dismounting of withdrawal sleeves is much easier and less costly
with hydraulic nuts (Fig. 94). Withdrawal sleeves projecting beyond
the shaft end, should be backed up by a thick-walled support ring.
93: Dismounting of a withdrawal

sleeve
a: with extraction nut
b: with nut and thrust bolts
applied to the inner ring
through a washer
FAG | 56
Dismounting
94: Hydraulic nut for dismounting

a withdrawal sleeve mounted
spherical roller bearing. The
projecting portion of the sleeve
is backed up by a thick-walled
support ring.
4.2 Thermal Methods

4.2.1 Heating Ring
Heating rings are used for dismounting cylindrical roller bearing and
needle roller bearing inner rings without lip or with one lip only. The
heating rings of light alloy are radially slotted. Their insulated handles
provide for easy handling (Fig. 95).
With an electric heating plate, the heating rings are heated to a temperature of 200 to 300 C, placed around the inner ring to be extracted and clamped by means of the handles. The heat is rapidly transferred from the heating ring to the inner ring. When the tight inner ring
fit on the shaft is loosened, withdraw both rings simultaneously. After extraction, remove the inner ring immediately from the heating
ring to avoid overheating. Heating rings are of great advantage for
occasional withdrawal of small or medium-size bearing rings, each
bearing size requiring its own heating ring.
95: Heating rings are used for

dismounting cylindrical roller
and needle roller bearing inner
rings.
57 | FAG
Dismounting
4.2.2 Induction Coil*)

Induction coils (also see chapter 3.2.5) are used for withdrawing
shrunk-on cylindrical roller and needle roller bearing inner rings of
100 mm bore onward from the shaft. Since the coil heats up at a very
fast rate, the amount of heat transferred to the shaft is minimized so
that the rings can be easily withdrawn.
Induction coils can be connected between two phases to the common three-phase mains (50 Hz or 60 Hz). For dismounting rolling
bearings with a maximum bore of 200 mm, coils are used which are
connected directly to the 380 V mains. For larger bearings, the harmless low voltage equipment - 20 to 40 V/50 Hz (60 Hz) - should be
used.
Low voltage induction coils are connected to the mains (380 V) via a
transformer (Fig. 96). The water-cooled winding provides for a better
efficiency, easier handling and lower weight of the coil.
For extraction, the induction coil is pushed over the inner ring and the
fingers provided on the coil grip the ring at its back face. The labyrinth ring features milled recesses to allow positioning of the fingers.
The current is switched on and, as soon as the ring is heated to 80 to
100C, the current is disconnected and the ring together with the appliance removed from the shaft.
*) For details see publ. no. WL 80107 EA "FAG Induction Heating Equipment".
96: Low-voltage induction coil with

transformer EFB 125/1, for cylindrical roller bearing inner rings of
635 mm bore:
Ring weight
390 kg
Approx. coil weight
70 kg
FAG | 58
Dismounting
4.2.3 Ring Burner

If no oil grooves are provided in the shaft for hydraulic mounting, and
if electric devices are not economical, inner rings of larger separable
bearings can also be dismounted by heating them with a flame.
Never should a welding torch be used because of the danger of
overheating or unequal heating of the ring. The uniform, high
hardness and dimensional stability of the bearing ring could be affected.
Ring burners (fig. 97) have proven to be an acceptable solution. The
burner should clear the ring surface by 40 to 50 mm. At the usual gas
pressure, the diameter of the burner jet is 2 mm. Flame temperature
and flame length are adjusted by the addition of air. The burner jets
should be bored in staggered arrangement and be spaced 20 to 45
mm apart. For small rings and heavy interference fits, the burner
should be operated for maximum heat output. Air should only be added after burner ignition. There must be provisions for the air pressure
to be delicately adjustable, since excessive pressure may force the
gas back into the mains.
Use ring burner
97: Ring burner for dismounting

inner rings
a = gas, b = air
59 | FAG
Dismounting
The surfaces of the hardened bearing rings are susceptible to

overheating which reduces hardness and changes the dimensions.
The burner should, therefore, always be held concentric to the bearing ring. The burner should be moved slowly and evenly across the
bearing ring in the axial direction. This will avoid a tempering effect
and additional stressing in the ring.
Crack unserviceable rings for a

removal
Safety information
Sometimes heavy fretting corrosion or cold welding can make the

regular removal of bearing rings impossible. In such cases which, of
course, only apply to unserveiceable rings, these are heated by a welding torch to 350C and hosed with cold water. The heavy internal
stresses thus produced in the ring will make it crack. Since the ring is
likely to burst, the area of dismounting must be well screened or covered to avoid accidents.
If - for example when a bearing is dismounted by means of a welding

torch - a temperature of approx. 300C and above is reached, fluorinated materials can release gases and vapours that are detrimental
to human health. FAG uses fluorinated materials for seals made of
flurocaoutchouc (FKM, FPM, e. g. Viton) or for fluorinated lubricating greases such as the rolling bearing grease Arcanol L79V. If high
temperatures cannot be avoided, the safety data sheet valid for the
fluorinated material in question has to be observed that can be obtained on request.
4.3 Hydraulic Method

With the hydraulic method, oil is injected between the mating surfaces. The oil film greatly reduces the friction between the mating parts
which can then be conveniently displaced in relation to one another
without the risk of damaging the mating surfaces (see chapter 3.3).
FAG | 60
The hydraulic method is suitable for dismounting bearings with tapered and cylindrical bore. In both cases, oil grooves, ducts and
threaded connections for the pump must be provided (Fig. 98). Larger adapter and withdrawal sleeves feature the corresponding grooves
and holes (Figs. 101, 102).
Dismounting
98: Position of oil grooves for dismounting by the hydraulic method.

a: Tapered shaft seat;
b: Cylindrical shaft seat, bearing
width B 80 mm, a d;
c: Cylindrical shaft seat, bearing
width B > 80 mm, a d;

b (0.5 to 0.6) B;
d: Cylindrical shaft seat, two inner

rings mounted side by side;
bearing width B > 80 mm;
c B - (1.5 to 2) d
a d,
For dismounting tapered bore bearings directly seated on the shaft,

injectors will do for pressure generation (Fig. 51). Cylindrical bore
bearings and adapter and withdrawal sleeve mounted bearings require a pump (Fig. 52, chapter 3.3).
For dismounting, a thicker oil with a viscosity of about 150 mm2/s
(cSt) at 20C (nominal viscosity 46 mm2/s at 40C) can be used. If
the contact surfaces are damaged, a high-viscosity oil of about
1,150 mm2/s (cSt) at 20C (nominal viscosity 320 mm2/s at 40C)
should be used. Fretting corrosion can be dissolved by anti-corrisive
additives in the oil.
4.3.1 Dismounting of Tapered Bore Bearings

For hydraulic dismounting of bearings, mounted on a tapered journal, a withdrawal sleeve or an adapter sleeve, oil is pumped between
the surfaces in contact. This releases the press fit instantly. The release being rather abrupt, a stop should be provided to control the
movement. This may be a shaft or sleeve nut or any other convenient
means (Figs. 99 to 102).
Restrict axial movement!
99: Dismounting a withdrawal

sleeve mounted spherical roller
bearing by the hydraulic method.
61 | FAG
Dismounting
Dissolve fretting corrosion by

the addition of rust solvents
The incidence of fretting corrosion may render dismounting more difficult. In this case, a rust-dissolving hydraulic oil should be used, especially for bearings of long service. For a seized withdrawal sleeve,
the extra force required to set it moving can be applied through the
withdrawal nut. If the withdrawal nut features thrust bolts (Fig. 103),
a plate or washer should be inserted between the bolts and the bearing, to avoid damaging the lips of the bearing ring.
100: Bearing seated on shaft; the

oil is pumped between the surfaces in contact; bearing disengages
spontaneously. Stop to be left on
shaft to restrict bearing movement.
101: Bearing seated on withdrawal

sleeve: Oil is pumped into withdrawal sleeve bore and O. D.; withdrawal sleeve disengages spontaneously. Nut to be left on shaft.
100
101
102a
102b
102 a-b: Adapter sleeve mounted

bearing: Oil is pumped between
adapter sleeve O. D. and bearing
bore; Bearing disenganges spontaneously. Stop to be left on sleeve.
a: Oil connection in small end of
sleeve
b: Oil connection in large end of
sleeve
103: Dismounting in difficult cases:

Oil containing rust solvents is
pumped between the mating surfaces. Higher-viscosity oils should
be used. Sleeve extraction is facilitated by applying nut provided
with thrust bolts.
FAG | 62
Dismounting
4.3.2 Dismounting of Cylindrical Bore Bearings

For cylindrical bore bearings, the use of the hydraulic technique is
generally limited to dismounting.
The first step is to apply a bearing extractor to the bearing ring (Figs.
104 a-c). Then, hydraulic oil is pumped into the oil grooves.
When the bearing ring moves easily, it should be displaced far
enough to expose the rear oil groove; the oil feed to this groove is
stopped.
104: dismounting of a cylindrical
bore inner ring with the hydraulic
method
a: Apply extractor to the inner ring
and pump oil into the two oil
grooves.
b: Pull ring far enough to expose
the rear oil groove and stop oil
feed to this groove.
The ring is given a further pull,
until it covers the forward oil
groove at either side by an identical length. The oil feed is stopped
so that the ring will freeze.
a
c: The extracting device is preloaded with a spring. Rebuilding the
oil film enables the ring to slide
off the shaft.
c
63 | FAG
Dismounting
Then the ring is given a further pull, until the ring covers the forward
oil groove at either side by an identical length (Fig. 104 b).
The oil feed to the forward groove is stopped which means that the
ring will freeze again. A spring is inserted into the guide sleeve of the
extractor and preloaded (Fig. 104 c).
Catch ring on its way off the

shaft
The travel stroke of the extractor spring should be a little greater than
the length occupied by the ring on the shaft. Rebuilding the oil film by
vigorous pumping enables the extractor to slide the ring off the shaft.
It is recommended to catch the ring on its way off.
The spring preload should be approximately F = 20 d (F in N and d
in mm). Whenever several rings are mounted on the shaft side by
side, they are dismounted separately.
The displacement of the ring up to the point where the forward oil
groove is still covered evenly, can generally be done by hand, since
upon injection of the hydraulic oil, the rings are easily displaceable.
The better the ring "floats" in the extraction phase, when the spring
pressure pulls it from the shaft, the less the probability of its getting
caught at the shaft end.
Use oil injection ring for

the removal of bearing from
plain shafts
105: Special device for extracting

a cylindrical bore spherical roller
bearing from a shaft without oil
grooves. The oil is fed into the fitting joint from the inner ring front
face.
FAG | 64
In the absence of oil grooves and ducts in the shaft, the oil can be injected between the mating surfaces from the inner ring front face (Fig.
105). To this effect, a sealed oil injection ring is placed in front of the
bearing feeding pressurized oil into the fitting joint. Mounting a sleeve
to the shaft end allows oil to be pumped between the mating surfaces all the time the dismounting operation lasts. If the use of such
a sleeve is not possible, a high-viscosity oil of 320 mm2/s (cSt) at 40C
must be used. An oil of this viscosity maintains an adequate oil film
for approximately 5 minutes which is sufficient for bearing removal.
5. Lubrication
These special extracting devices are relatively complicated. They are,

for example, used for applications where no oil grooves are provided
in the shafts or axles for strength reasons, but which require frequent
dismounting (e. g. for rail vehicles).
5. Lubrication
The primary purpose of the lubricant is to build a load-carrying film
separating the bearing components in rolling and sliding contact in
order to minimize friction and wear. The lubricant should also protect
the bearing against corrosion. If required, it should also act as a
sealant, and in case of circulating oil lubrication, as a coolant.
Due to deterioration and mechanical stressing, the lubricants become
unuseable. Change of oil or grease or replenishment, i. e. bearing
maintenance, has a favorable influence on the bearing service life.
Under certain sealing and environmental conditions, appropriate lubricant selection allows for a lubrication for life. For detailed information see also FAG Publ. No. WL 81115 "The Lubrication of Rolling
Bearings".
5.1 Greases
Only high-grade greases - generally on a metal soap basis - should
be used. Rolling bearing greases for extreme temperatures contain
different thickeners and a synthetic oil instead of the mineral oil.
Only use time-tested greases
Greases containing extreme pressure (EP) additives are used in highload and low-speed applications. High-speed bearings and bearings
which ask for low friction, are lubricated with greases containing a
thin synthetic base oil.
The operating temperatures specified by the grease supplier should
be kept in mind. Rolling bearing greases should be stable against deterioration and must not change their structure, even after long periods of operation.
Consider grease application

range
65 | FAG
Lubrication
The table 7.23 on p. 113 lists the FAG rolling bearing greases Arcanol and their properties.
5.2 Oils
Only use time-tested oils
For rolling bearing lubrication, mineral oils are generally used. They
should have the following properties:
Utmost cleanliness, stability against deterioration, good viscositytemperature behaviour and good water repellency. In addition, the lubricating oil must ensure satisfactory protection of the bearing
against corrosion. Very high and very low operating temperatures require the use of synthetic oils. Oils for highly loaded and low-speed
bearings should contain EP-additives.
5.3 Selection of Lubricant

Greases are generally preferred to oils because they simplify maintenance and can be used as sealants. The asset of oil is that it readily
feeds into all areas of contact and carries off heat. Its disadvantage
is that it involves a more complex design of the bearing location and
especially of the sealing system.
The following factors determine the selection of lubricant:
Operating Temperature
Depending on the speed, the temperature of a bearing location is a
function of bearing friction, lubricant friction, heat dissipation to the
outside, and, as the case may be, heat supply from the outside.
Watch steady-state temperature
A bearing mounting is reliable, if the steady-state temperature settles at a level acceptable for the application. A continuous temperature increase, on the other hand, necessitates special measures (extra cooling, change-over to a different lubricant etc.). A short-term
temperature rise occurs with grease relubrication.
The viscosity of lubricating oils decreases with increasing temperature and increases when the temperature drops. Preference should
be given to oils the viscosity of which varies little with temperature
(good V-T behaviour).
Watch viscosity at operating

temperature
FAG | 66
The higher the expected operating temperature, the higher should be

the nominal viscosity of the oil. The nominal or mid-point viscosity is
the viscosity for oils at 40C. The oils are classified in viscosity
grades (ISO VG) (DIN 51519).
Lubrication
The permissible temperature range of greases varies with the saponification bases. As a rule, the upper limits are:
Calcium soap base: + 50C (120F)
Exact values of greases with different saponification bases are

available from manufacturers'
catalogues
Sodium soap base: + 70C (160F) to 120C (250F)

Lithium soap base: + 110C (230F) to 130C (265F)
Diverse complex soap greases, gels, and greases containing entirely
synthetic thickeners feature temperature limits beyond 130C
(265F). Greases with thin synthetic base oils are especially applicable for low temperatures.
Exact values for the commercial greases are available from manufacturers' catalogues.
In selecting oils and greases, it should be borne in mind that a high
temperature speeds up deterioration and decreases the lubricant
service life.
Loads and speed

Under the given operating conditions, the lubricant must form a load
carrying lubricating film. With oil, the load carrying capacity of the film
is primarily a function of viscosity. The lower the bearing speed, the
higher the oil viscosity in operating condition. Information on viscosity 1 can be seen in the FAG catalogue WL 41520. Consideration
must be given to the fact that bearing temperatures depend on load
and speed. The operating temperature required for determination of
the nominal viscosity must be estimated.
High-viscosity oils for low

speeds
Increases in speed are associated with increasing lubricant friction

and accordingly, increasing bearing temperature. The friction will be
higher, the more viscous the lubricant is. On the other hand, higher
temperatures lower viscosity which decreases the load carrying capacity of the lubricant film.
Observe relationship between

speed, lubricant friction,
temperature and viscosity
The permissible speeds for the various types and sizes of rolling bearings for grease and oil lubrication are listed in the FAG catalogues.
Permissible speeds for oil and

grease lubrication see FAG
Rolling Bearing Catalogues
The use of solid lubricants as e. g. graphite and MoS2 is limited to ultralow speeds and creeping motions only.
Solid lubricants only for

creeping speeds
High-load applications call for oils containing EP additives. Greases

for high-load applications are characterized by base oils of high viscosity and EP additives.
67 | FAG
Lubrication
Bearing Size
Small bearings are generally lubricated with a low-viscosity oil or with
a very soft grease to minimize lubricant friction in the bearing. In
large bearings, the lubricant friction plays a minor role, and the choice
between oil or grease is, in this respect, of secondary importance.
Moisture
Consider lubricant behaviour
with moisture
The reaction of rolling bearing greases against moisture is different

from one grease to the other. Only the water-repellent calcium base
greases (Ca-greases) possess a safe sealing action against water.
They are used, therefore, in labyrinths for operating temperatures not
exceeding 50C, acting as sealing agents.
The sodium base greases feature a higher limiting temperature than
the calcium greases. They emulsify with water and are indicated for
applications with a limited amount of moisture (e. g. condensation
water). Since the sodium base greases are water-absorbing, there is
the risk that so much water will be absorbed that they will wash out
of the bearing.
Lithium base greases do not absorb as much water as sodium base
greases. Because of their reasonable resistance to water and their
wide temperature range they have become the greases of preference
for rolling bearings.
Also with oils, their moisture and water resisting properties must be
considered. Oils that separate water well should be preferred, because they allow the water to settle in the oil sump or reservoir when
the machine is at rest.
The protection against corrosion is improved by anti-corrosive additives in the oils or greases.
Contamination
Maintain cleanliness of lubricant
reservoir, lubricators and grease
nipples.
Relubrication involves the risk of bearing contamination. High standards of cleanliness should, therefore, be maintained for the lubricant
reservoir and the lubricators and also when handling the lubricant.
Grease nipples should be cleaned before relubrication.
Mixing of Lubricants
Never mix different
lubricants
FAG | 68
Lubricants of different saponification bases should not be mixed to

avoid impairment of temperature stability and lubricating properties.
The same applies to oils.
Lubrication
Lubricant Quantity
With grease lubrication, the bearing cavities should be packed to capacity. Only partly fill (20 to 35% of free space) extremely fast running
bearings. The amount of grease to be filled into both lateral housing
cavities depends on n dm.
(n = maximum operating speed
dm =
D+d
2
mean bearing diameter)
Speed index
Amount of grease filled

in the housing space
n dm < 50000 min-1 mm
full
-1
n dm = 50000 up to 500000 min mm
60%
Overgreasing at medium and higher speeds causes churning resulting in an undesirable temperature rise which may harm both bearing
and lubricant.
Rolling bearings with seals or shields are packed with grease to approx. 35% only during manufacture.
With oil lubrication, too much oil in the housing has similarly detrimental effects: the churning action overheats the oil and exposes it
to air oxygen, causing oxidation and foaming.
With sump lubrication, the oil level in the housing should be no higher than the centre point of the lowest ball or roller when the bearing
is at rest.
69 | FAG
6. Rolling Bearing Damage
6. Rolling Bearing Damage

The life of a rolling bearing depends on the total number of stress cycles and the loads incurred by rolling elements and raceways.
The standardized calculation method for dynamically stressed bearings is based on material fatigue (pitting) causing the damage.
Normal fatigue manifests itself by flaking or spalling of the rolling surfaces (Fig. 106). An increasing local stress may result in fracture of the
ring (Fig. 107).
If the bearing fails earlier than predicted by the life calculation, it
should be checked for overloading. With this failure cause excluded,
faulty mounting or poor maintenance or wear might be the cause for
the damage. The following pages describe some of the more common forms of bearing damage and their causes.
106: Flaked inner ring of a deep

groove ball bearing
107: Fracture of the inner ring

of a deep groove ball bearing
as final stage of fatigue
FAG | 70
106
107
Rolling Bearing Damage
6.1 Why Does a Bearing Fail?

6.1.1 Faulty Mounting
Local damage to the raceways, such as nicks, score marks or indentations suggest faulty mounting. This type of damage occurs, if, for
instance, the inner ring of a cylindrical roller bearing is inserted outof-square into the outer ring, or if the mounting force is applied
through the rolling elements (Figs. 108 to 111).
Surface damage is also caused, when foreign particles enter the
bearing and are cycled (see chapter 6.1.2).
The damage can be recognized for instance by a louder running noise;
in the long run, it may lead to premature fatigue of the functional
surfaces.
The typical sign for surface damage are the raised edges of the indentations.
108: Ball indentations in the raceway of a deep groove ball bearing

resulting from faulty mounting
71 | FAG
109: Scored raceway of a cylindrical roller bearing inner ring
110: Premature fatigue of a cylindrical roller bearing outer ring

caused by score marks visible at "a"
111: Fractured lip of a barrel roller

bearing inner ring driven up its seat
by hammer blows
The location of the load zone in a bearing ring results from the direction of the externally applied loads and from the conditions of rotation. The load zone can soon be recognized by slight frosting on the
raceways indicating whether the bearing was loaded as specified.
FAG | 72
112: Running tracks caused by offsquare mounting of a stationary

deep groove ball bearing inner ring
112
113
113: One-sided flaking caused by

off-square mounting of a stationary tapered roller bearing cone
Unusual running tracks suggest detrimental preloading which may

be caused by too tight fits, excessive axial adjustment, form inaccuracies of shaft or housing, misalignment or by a tight fit of the floating
bearing (Figs. 112 and 113).
6.1.2 Contamination
Foreign particle indentations in the functional surfaces may lead to
premature fatigue (see chapter 6.1.1). Foreign particles with abrasive
effect, however, accelerate bearing failure due to wear. The surfaces
are roughened and look dull. Progressive wear causes excessive
clearance.
Possible causes:
Contaminated parts
Moulding sand in housings
Inadequate seals
Contaminated lubricants
Metallic abrasion from gears brought into the bearing by the
lubricant.
73 | FAG
6.1.3 Corrosion
Corrosion in rolling bearings may occur in various forms and have different causes. The damage shows in an uneven and loud running
noise. The rust abraded by the rolling elements causes wear.
Figures 114 and 115 show corrosion damage due to moisture or other
corrosive media.
Possible causes:
Inadequate sealing against moisture,
acid fumes,
lubricants containing acids,
condensation,
unsuitable storage of the rolling bearings in the warehouse.
False brinelling is identified by marks in the raceways at rolling element spacing. In contrast to the rolling element indentations caused
by incorrect mounting, they have no raised edges (Fig. 116). The increased number of indentations shown in Fig. 117 is a result of occasional turning of the bearing.
False brinelling is caused by vibrations in the contact areas of parts
while these are stationary, resulting in wear. Susceptible to such damage are machines which are subjected to vibrations while stationary
or during transportation. Possible remedy: Securing by wedges
114: Corrosion of tapered roller
bearing cone
115: Corrosion marks in the raceway of a self-aligning ball bearing

outer ring
FAG | 74
114
115
or similar means for transportation or keeping the bearing in rotation

(e. g. on ships).
Fretting corrosion, however, occurs at the fitting surfaces, i. e. in the
bearing bore or at the bearing outside diameter. It is caused by relatively loose fits or too soft mating components. Minute motions
(micro-slipping) in the fitting joint may cause heavy wear resulting in
an impeded floating bearing function or fracture of the shaft due to
notch stresses. Possible remedy: Tight bearing fits or reinforcement
of mating structure.
6.1.4 Passage of Electric Current
Continuous passage of electric current causes brownish flutes parallel to the axis over the entire circumference of one or both raceways
as well as on the rolling elements (Fig. 118 and 119).
6.1.5 Imperfect Lubrication
Starved lubrication is caused by an insufficient lubricant supply or by
use of an improper lubricant. If the lubricating film does not sufficiently separate the parts in rolling contact, sliding motion and wear
result. Since maximum material stressing occurs at the raceway surfaces, micro pits and consequently large-area superficial flaking is
produced (Fig. 120).
116: Indents caused by false brinelling of the raceway of a selfaligning ball bearing outer ring
116
117
117: False brinelling in the raceway

of a cylindrical roller bearing inner
ring - due to vibrations
75 | FAG
118: Fluted rollers of a spherical

roller bearing due to the passage
of electric current
119: Fluted raceway of a spherical

roller bearing outer ring due to the
passage of electric current
118
119
In the case of overlubrication, the lubricant heats up due to the churning action and looses its lubricity. Overheating, i. a. catastrophic failure of the bearing, may be the result. Prevent lubricant retention within the bearing, especially for high-speed bearings.
The possible consequences of contaminated lubricants are described
in chapter 6.1.2.
120: A non load-carrying lubricating film causes large-area superficial flaking on cylindrical rollers.
FAG | 76
6.2 How to Recognize Bearing Damage in Operation?*
Symtoms
Source of Trouble
Examples
Uneven running
Damaged rings or rolling

elements
Motor vehicles:
Increased wheel wobble and
vibration of steering system
Contamination
Fans: Increasing vibration
Excessive clearance
Sawmills: Increasing knocking
in connection rods
Combustion engines:
Increased vibration in crankshaft
Reduced working accuracy
Wear due to contaminants or

insufficient lubrication
Damaged rings or
rolling elements
Lathe:
Gradual development of
chatter marks on workpiece
Grinders:
Waviness of ground surface
Cold Rolling Mill:
Period surface defects on
rolled material such as
stretcher strains, ghost lines
etc.
Unusual running noise:

Whining or high pitched
noise
Insufficient operating clearance
Low pitched rumbling

or irregular noise
Excessive operating clearance

Damaged running surfaces
Contamination
Inadequate lubricant
Gradual change
in running noise
Changes in operating
clearance caused by
temperature.
Damaged raceway
(from contamination or fatigue)
Electric motors, gears; with

gearboxes, the bearing noise
is hard to identify, since it is
generally drowned in the
running noise of the gears
*) See also Publ. No. WL 80136 "Diagnosis of rolling bearings in machines and plants, 'FAG Rolling Bearing Analyser'" and
WL 80137 "Rolling bearing diagnosis with the FAG Detector".
77 | FAG
6.3 How to Pinpoint Bearing Damage?

The examples shown in Figs. 106 to 120 are striking damage cases.
They can be clearly defined and diagnosed. A detailed discussion of
all imaginable combinations of bearing damage would certainly go
beyond the scope of this manual.
In the field, the diagnosis of the primary cause of failure is not always
easy. In many cases an examination of, for instance, the running
tracks, allows certain conclusions to be drawn. Advice for the avoidance of future trouble can, however, hardly be given without knowing
operating conditions, lubrication and overall design of the machine.
Information should, moreover, be available on the damage symptoms
in evidence and on relevant secondary phenomena.
6.3.1 Observations prior to Dismounting

Keep track of operating
behaviour and record
observations
Prior to dismounting, the following four conditions should be surveyed

and the survey result be made a matter of record. The importance
of this procedure cannot be overemphasized, since, after bearing
dismounting and cleaning of bearing and housing, this evidence is irretrievably lost.
Contamination
What are the overall conditions of the machine, particularly near the
bearing location? Are there deposits of dirt or residues of the machined or processed material? Could water, causics, cutting fluids,
vapours and fumes have entered the bearing housing?
Loss of Lubricant
Was there any chance of lubricant escape? To find out, check the oil
gauge level and the sealing gaps at the shaft outlet, all joints between
housing and cover, and the seals of the oil pipes, drain plug and oil
gauge.
Running Noise
Bearing damage can frequently be recognized by changes in the running noise. The nature of the noise should be specified as exactly as
possible by indicating whether it is even or pulsating, recurrent or
nonrecurrent, rumbling, whining, singing, or knocking. If the noise is
recurrent, its frequency should be recorded. For higher speeds, this
may require complicated recording equipment; for low speeds,
FAG | 78
however, it has been found practical to tap with a pencil on a piece of

paper at the rate of noise recurrency, and to count the dots after a given number of seconds. The result should give a clue as to whether
the trouble occurs, for instance, at inner ring or cage frequency. An
attempt should also be made to assess the noise level.
Keep track of behaviour and

record observations
Before disassembly, the bearing should once more be turned by

hand. Often this allows easy identification and accurate characterization of running irregularities.
Case History and Secondary Evidence

The damage should be recorded, while still fresh in mind. It is important that all details be listed, i. e. the time the malfunction was first
noticed, the initial symptoms and the alterations in noise or temperature occurring with time. If the trouble starts suddenly, the position
of the control handles and the operating position of the machine
should be noted. Any former modifications made on the machine, for
instance clearance adjustment, installation of new shafts, sleeves, or
spacers, increases in capacity and speed should be included in the
analysis. When these modifications and the onset of the bearing
trouble coincide, the expert will certainly be able to draw significant
conclusions.
6.3.2 Observations during Dismounting

The following four conditions should be watched:
Lubrication
In order to examine the cause of failure of the dismounted bearing,
the lubricant must not be removed. Even an expert cannot define the
cause of failure of a damaged, but cleaned bearing. Avoid additional
contamination of the damaged bearing.
Do not wash out lubricant, but

take samples
Oil Lubrication
With oil-lubricated bearings, the oil and, as the case may be, the coolant, are drained. The oil should be collected in a clean container, especially, if there is suspicion of dirt, metal chips or an unusual
amount of grit from nearby gears. If the suspicion proves true, enough
oil will thus be available for a thorough investigation.
79 | FAG
Grease Lubrication
Dismounting of grease-lubricated bearings starts with the removal of
covers, caps or shields. These parts should not be immediately
washed out, but stored in a clean place, until the nature of bearing
failure is clarified. The same applies to felt and rubber seals and to
any other seals and shields. Even if maintenance instructions call for
the installation of new seals at each overhaul, the old ones should be
kept for some time, as their condition may be indicative of the efficiency of the sealing system.
Two grease samples should be taken, one from the bearing interior
and another from the housing. Dirty grease nipples may contaminate
grease used for relubrication; in this case a sample should be taken
from the grease duct.
A generous quantity should always be sampled. The sampled grease
should be kept in clean containers or spread on clean oil-paper and
identified such that its origin can be traced back any time.
Looseness of Locating Devices

Check tightness of
locating nuts
As dismounting progresses, check tightness of the nuts which provide for axial location of the bearing inner ring. This is of particular importance with double row angular contact ball bearings with split inner ring, and with four-point bearings. Any loosening of axial location
entails a change in bearing kinematics and clearance. This also
applies to tapered roller bearings and angular contact ball bearings
mounted in opposition. In the case of adapter and withdrawal
sleeves and tapered seats, the tightness of the clamping or locknuts
should be checked.
Position of Bearing Rings

Upon removal of the nuts, the ring faces should be cleaned to check
the position of the rings relative to the housing and the shaft.
Prepare sketch of bearing

arrangement
FAG | 80
Generally, the running tracks on the raceways give sufficient evidence

of the direction of load; this evidence is, however, of little value, if the
running tracks are unusual and nothing is known on how the outer ring
was mounted in the housing and the inner ring on the shaft. For this
purpose, a sketch should be made showing the position of the bearing
number stamping relative to a reference point in the housing or on the
shaft. The sketch should also show the direction into which the
stamped face of the bearing ring points, i. e. towards the shaft center
or the shaft end. For separable bearings, such as cylindrical roller
bearings, magneto bearings and four-point bearings, this applies to
both rings. If, upon disassembly, the running tracks are found to be
unusual, conclusions can be drawn as to the type and direction of load,
perhaps also on detrimental preload, furnishing a clue to the cause of
damage.
Examination of Bearing Seats

When extracting the bearing, a note should be made of any unusually easy or difficult removal of the rings from their seats. The bearing
components of separable bearings must be kept together and not be
mixed up with parts of other bearings.
An inspection of the adjacent machine parts should be made at the
same time, especially when the machine has to be quickly reassembled with the new bearings to avoid a prolonged close-down. The
shaft and housing seat diameters should always be measured. Special care should be given to the roundness of the seats. The condition of the driving and the driven machine elements, especially of
gears and other moving parts, should also be inspected. Sliding
marks and the contact pattern will frequently furnish evidence on the
shaft misalignment.
Measure shaft and housing diameter, check roundness of seat
6.3.3 Bearing Inspection

Upon completion of dismounting, the damaged bearing itself should
be examined. Check cleanliness, condition of the mating surfaces
(dimensional stability) and function (bearing clearance, smooth running) of the complete bearing. The damage in evidence on the bearing and the recorded secondary phenomena are, in most cases, sufficient to obtain a clear picture of the damage history. Doubtful cases
should be reported to the nearest FAG Engineering Office.
In case of doubt,
contact the nearest
FAG Engineering Office
There are, of course, many applications where no necessity exists for

going into such detail. This is the case with machines built in large
numbers, where the "weak points" are known. Neither will one go to
great lengths with low-cost bearings. However, in customer built or
special purpose machines where a seemingly unexplainable bearing
damage occurs, the described secondary evidence should, in any
case, be a valuable diagnostic aid.
81 | FAG
7. Tables
7.1 Bearing Designation
62
05
.2RSR
.N
.C2
Prefixes for Parts of

Standardized Bearings
Suffixes for Special Designs
Suffixes for Tolerances and Bearing Clearance
K.
Cage with rolling elements,

completely assembled
Tapered bore 1:12
K30
Tapered bore 1:30
no
suffix
Separable ring of cylindrical

and tapered roller bearings
Maximum capacity design
Ring of cylindrical and tapered roller bearings with

roller set, ring not separable
L
R
WS. Shaft washer of a thrust

bearing
GS. Housing washer of a thrust
bearing
New, modified internal

design
Tolerance class PN (normal

tolerance) and clearance
group CN (normal)
P6 Tolerance class P6
Lubricating groove and

holes in outer ring
DA
Split inner ring
SP Tolerance class SP
ZR
One shield
UP Tolerance class UP
.2ZR
Two shields
C1 Clearance group C1 (<C2)
RSR
One seal
C2 Clearance group C2 (<normal)
.2RSR Two seals
C3 Clearance group C3 (>normal)
C4 Clearance group C4 (>C3)
Circular groove in O.D.

for snap ring
The suffixes for tolerance and

clearance are combined, e. g.:
P52 = tolerance class P5 and
clearance group C2
See next page for designation of
bearing series
Suffixes for Cage Design
Bore
Diameter
mm
Machined steel cage
Machined light metal cage
Machined brass cage
3 to 9
3 to 9
00
10
Textile laminated phenolic

cage
01
12
TV
02
15
Moulded cage of glass fibre

reinforced polyamide 66
Pressed steel cage
Pressed brass cage
Window type cage
Snap type cage
03
17
/500
Bore reference number

x 5 = Bore
diameter
500
/530
530
04
96
20
480
Outer ring riding
Inner ring riding
Special Suffixes
S1-S4
Special heat treatment
is added to the
material symbol
Bore
Reference
Number
83 | FAG
Tables
7.2 Designation of Bearing Series: Ball Bearings

Bearing
Series
Ball Bearings
Type
Deep
Groove
Ball
Bearings
Angular
Contact
Ball
Bearings
SelfAligning
Ball
Bearings
Thrust
Ball
Bearings
Angular
Contact
Thrust
Ball
Bearings
Single
Row
or
Single
Direction
Double
Row
or
Double
Direction
With
Flat
Housing
Washer
With
Spherical
Housing
Washer
Width
or
Height
Series
Diameter
Series
618
160
60
x
x
x
x
x
x
1
0
1
8
0
0
62
63
64
x
x
x
x
x
x
0
0
0
2
3
4
42
43
x
x
x
x
2
2
2
3
12
112
13
113
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
0
0
0
0
2
2
3
3
22
23
x
x
x
x
2
2
2
3
B 719
B 70
B 72
72
73
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
1
1
0
0
0
9
0
2
2
3
QJ 2
QJ 3
x
x
x
x
0
0
2
3
32
33
x
x
3
3
2
3
1
1
1
1
1
2
3
4
x
x
511
512
513
514
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
532
533
534
x
x
x
x
x
x
522
523
524
x
x
x
x
x
x
542
543
544
x
x
x
x
x
x
2344
2347
x
x
7602
7603
x
x
FAG | 84
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
2
3
4
2
2
2
x
x
x
2
3
4
2
3
4
Tables
7.2 Designation of Bearing Series: Roller Bearings

Bearing
Series
Roller Bearings
Type
Cylindrical
Roller
Bearings
Tapered
Roller
Bearings
Barrel
Roller
Bearings
Spherical
Roller
Bearings
Cylindrical
Roller
Thrust
Bearings
Spherical
Roller
Thrust
Bearings
Single
Row
Double
Row
Width
or
Height
Series
Diameter
Series
N 2; NU 2;
NJ 2; NUP 2
N 3; NU 3;
NJ 3; NUP 3
N 4; NU 4;
NJ 4; NUP 4
NU 10
NU 22;
NJ 22; NUP 22
NU 23;
NJ 23; NUP 23
NN 30
NNU 49
x
x
x
x
3
4
0
9
302
303
313
320
322
323
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
0
0
1
2
2
2
2
3
3
0
2
3
329
330
331
332
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
2
3
3
3
9
0
1
2
x
x
x
0
0
0
2
3
4
0
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
3
2
3
0
1
2
3
9
0
1
x
x
x
9
9
9
2
3
4
x
x
1
1
1
2
202
203
204
213
222
223
230
231
232
233
239
240
241
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
292
293
294
811
812
x
x
85 | FAG
Tables
7.3 Shaft Tolerances

Dimensions in mm
Nominal shaft over
diameter
to
3
6
6
10
10
18
18
30
30
50
50
65
65
80
80
100
100
120
120
140
140
160
160
180
180
200
0
12
0
15
0
15
0
20
0
20
0
25
0
25
0
25
0
30
Tolerance in microns (normal tolerance)

Bearing bore diameter
Deviation dmp
0
8
Diagram of fit
Shaft
Bearing
Shaft tolerance in microns
e7
20
32
25
40
32
50
40
61
50
75
60
90
60
90
72
107
72
107
85
125
83
125
85
125
100
146
e8
20
38
25
47
32
59
40
73
50
89
60
106
60
106
72
126
72
126
85
148
85
148
85
148
100
172
f6
10
18
13
22
16
27
20
33
25
41
30
49
30
49
36
58
36
58
43
68
43
68
43
68
50
79
f7
10
22
13
28
16
34
20
41
25
50
30
60
30
60
36
71
36
71
43
83
43
83
43
83
50
96
g5
4
9
5
11
6
14
7
16
9
20
10
23
10
23
12
27
12
27
14
32
14
32
14
32
15
35
g6
4
12
5
14
6
17
7
20
9
25
10
29
10
29
12
34
12
34
14
39
14
39
14
39
15
44
h5
0
5
0
6
0
8
0
9
0
11
0
13
0
13
0
15
0
15
0
18
0
18
0
18
0
20
h6
0
8
0
9
0
11
0
13
0
16
0
19
0
19
0
22
0
22
0
25
0
25
0
25
0
29
j5
+3
2
+4
2
+5
3
+5
4
+6
5
+6
7
+6
7
+6
9
+6
9
+7
11
+7
11
+7
11
+7
13
j6
+6
2
+7
2
+8
3
+9
4
+11
5
+12
7
+12
7
+13
9
+13
9
+14
11
+14
11
+14
11
+16
13
js 3
+1,25
1,25
+1,25
1,25
+1,5
1,5
+2
2
+2
2
+2,5
2,5
+2,5
2,5
+3
3
+3
3
+4
4
+4
4
+4
4
+5
5
js 4
+2
2
+2
2
+2,5
2,5
+3
3
+3,5
3,5
+4
4
+4
4
+5
5
+5
5
+6
6
+6
6
+6
6
+7
7
js 5
+2,5
2,5
+3
3
+4
4
+4,5
4,5
+5,5
5,5
+6,5
6,5
+6,5
6,5
+7,5
7,5
+7,5
7,5
+9
9
+9
9
+9
9
+10
10
js 6
+4
4
+4,5
4,5
+5,5
5,5
+6,5
6,5
+8
8
+9,5
9,5
+9,5
9,5
+11
11
+11
11
+12,5
12,5
+12,5
12,5
+12,5
12,5
+14,5
14,5
k3
+2,5
0
+2,5
0
+3
0
+4
0
+4
0
+5
0
+5
0
+6
0
+6
0
+8
0
+8
0
+8
0
+10
0
k4
+5
+1
+5
+1
+6
+1
+8
+2
+9
+2
+10
+2
+10
+2
+13
+3
+13
+3
+15
+3
+15
+3
+15
+3
+18
+4
k5
+6
+1
+7
+1
+9
+1
+11
+2
+13
+2
+15
+2
+15
+2
+18
+3
+18
+3
+21
+3
+21
+3
+21
+3
+24
+4
k6
+9
+1
+10
+1
+12
+1
+15
+2
+18
+2
+21
+2
+21
+2
+25
+3
+25
+3
+28
+3
+28
+3
+28
+3
+33
+4
FAG | 86
0
8
0
8
0
10
Tables
200
225
225
250
250
280
280
315
315
355
355
400
400
450
450
500
500
560
560
630
630
710
710
800
800
900
900
1000
1000
1120
1120
1250
0
-30
0
-30
0
-35
0
-35
0
-40
0
-40
0
-45
0
-45
0
-50
0
-50
0
-75
0
-75
0
-100
0
-100
0
-125
0
-125
-100
-146
-100
-146
-110
-162
-110
-162
-125
-182
-125
-182
-135
-198
-135
-198
-145
-215
-145
-215
-160
-240
-160
-240
-170
-260
-170
-260
-195
-300
-195
-300
-100
-172
-100
-172
-110
-191
-110
-191
-125
-214
-125
-214
-135
-232
-135
-232
-145
-255
-145
-255
-160
-285
-160
-285
-170
-310
-170
-310
-195
-360
-195
-360
-50
-79
-50
-79
-56
-88
-56
-88
-62
-98
-62
-98
-68
-108
-68
-108
-76
-120
-76
-120
-80
-130
-80
-130
-86
-142
-86
-142
-98
-164
-98
-164
-50
-96
-50
-96
-56
-108
-56
-108
-62
-119
-62
-119
-68
-131
-68
-131
-76
-146
-76
-146
-80
-160
-80
-160
-86
-176
-86
-176
-98
-203
-98
-203
-15
-35
-15
-35
-17
-40
-17
-40
-18
-43
-18
-43
-20
-47
-20
-47
-22
-51
-22
-51
-24
-56
-24
-56
-26
-62
-26
-62
-28
-70
-28
-70
-15
-44
-15
-44
-17
-49
-17
-49
-18
-54
-18
-54
-20
-60
-20
-60
-22
-66
-22
-66
-24
-74
-24
-74
-26
-82
-26
-82
-28
-94
-28
-94
0
-20
0
-20
0
-23
0
-23
0
-25
0
-25
0
-27
0
-27
0
-29
0
-29
0
-32
0
-32
0
-36
0
-36
0
-42
0
-42
0
-29
0
-29
0
-32
0
-32
0
-36
0
-36
0
-40
0
-40
0
-44
0
-44
0
-50
0
-50
0
-56
0
-56
0
-66
0
-66
+7
-13
+7
-13
+7
-16
+7
-16
+7
-18
+7
-18
+7
-20
+7
-20
+16
-13
+16
-13
+16
-16
+16
-16
+18
-18
+18
-18
+20
-20
+20
-20
+22
-22
+22
-22
+25
-25
+25
-25
+28
-28
+28
-28
+33
-33
+33
-33
+5
-5
+5
-5
+6
-6
+6
-6
+6,5
-6,5
+6,5
-6,5
+7,5
-7,5
+7,5
-7,5
+7
-7
+7
-7
+8
-8
+8
-8
+9
-9
+9
-9
+10
-10
+10
-10
+10
-10
+10
-10
+11,5
-11,5
+11,5
-11,5
+12,5
-12,5
+12,5
-12,5
+13,5
-13,5
+13,5
-13,5
+14,5
-14,5
+14,5
-14,5
+16
-16
+16
-16
+18
-18
+18
-18
+21
-21
+21
-21
+14,5
-14,5
+14,5
-14,5
+16
-16
+16
-16
+18
-18
+18
-18
+20
-20
+20
-20
+22
-22
+22
-22
+25
-25
+25
-25
+28
-28
+28
-28
+33
-33
+33
-33
+10
0
+10
0
+12
0
+12
0
+13
0
+13
0
+15
0
+15
0
+18
+4
+18
+4
+20
+4
+20
+4
+22
+4
+22
+4
+25
+5
+25
+5
+24
+4
+24
+4
+27
+4
+27
+4
+29
+4
+29
+4
+32
+5
+32
+5
+29
0
+29
0
+32
0
+32
0
+36
0
+36
0
+42
0
+42
0
+33
+4
+33
+4
+36
+4
+36
+4
+40
+4
+40
+4
+45
+5
+45
+5
+44
+0
+44
+0
+50
+0
+50
+0
+56
+0
+56
+0
+66
+0
+66
+0
87 | FAG
Tables
7.3 Shaft Tolerances (continuation)

Dimensions in mm
Nominal shaft over
diameter
to
3
6
6
10
10
18
18
30
30
50
50
65
65
80
80
100
100
120
120
140
140
160
160
180
180
200
0
12
0
15
0
15
0
20
0
20
0
25
0
25
0
25
0
30

Bearing bore diameter
Deviation dmp
0
8
0
8
0
8
0
10
Diagram of fit
Shaft
Bearing
Shaft tolerance in microns
m5
+9
+4
+12
+6
+15
+7
+17
+8
+20
+9
+24
+11
+24
+11
+28
+13
+28
+13
+33
+15
+33
+15
+33
+15
+37
+17
m6
+12
+4
+15
+6
+18
+7
+21
+8
+25
+9
+30
+11
+30
+11
+35
+13
+35
+13
+40
+15
+40
+15
+40
+15
+46
+17
n5
+13
+8
+16
+10
+20
+12
+24
+15
+28
+17
+33
+20
+33
+20
+38
+23
+38
+23
+45
+27
+45
+27
+45
+27
+51
+31
n6
+16
+8
+19
+10
+23
+12
+28
+15
+33
+17
+39
+20
+39
+20
+45
+23
+45
+23
+52
+27
+52
+27
+52
+27
+60
+31
p6
+20
+12
+24
+15
+29
+18
+35
+22
+42
+26
+51
+32
+51
+32
+59
+37
+59
+37
+68
+43
+68
+43
+68
+43
+79
+50
p7
+24
+12
+30
+15
+36
+18
+43
+22
+51
+26
+62
+32
+62
+32
+72
+37
+72
+37
+83
+43
+83
+43
+83
+43
+96
+50
r6
+23
+15
+28
+19
+34
+23
+41
+28
+50
+34
+60
+41
+62
+43
+73
+51
+76
+54
+88
+63
+90
+65
+93
+68
+106
+77
r7
+27
+15
+34
+19
+41
+23
+49
+28
+59
+34
+71
+41
+73
+43
+86
+51
+89
+54
+103
+63
+105
+65
+108
+68
+123
+77
s6
+27
+19
+32
+23
+39
+28
+48
+35
+59
+43
+72
+53
+78
+59
+93
+71
+101
+79
+117
+92
+125
+100
+133
+108
+151
+122
s7
+31
+19
+38
+23
+46
+28
+56
+35
+68
+43
+83
+53
+89
+59
+106
+71
+114
+79
+132
+92
+140
+100
+148
+108
+168
+122
Shaft tolerance for withdrawal sleeves and adapter sleeves (microns)

h7 IT5
2
0
12
2,5
0
15
3
0
18
4
0
21
4,5
0
25
5,5
0
30
6,5
0
30
6,5
0
35
7,5
0
35
7,5
0
40
9
0
40
9
0
40
9
0
46
10
h8 IT5
2
0
18
2,5
0
22
3
0
27
4
0
33
4,5
0
39
5,5
0
46
6,5
0
46
6,5
0
54
7,5
0
54
7,5
0
63
9
0
63
9
0
63
9
0
72
10
h9 IT6
2
0
30
4
0
36
4,5
0
43
5,5
0
52
6,5
0
62
8
0
74
9,5
0
74
9,5
0
87
11
0
87
11
0
100
12,5
0
100
12,5
0
100
12,5
0
115
14,5
h10 IT7
2
0
48
6
0
58
7,5
0
70
9
0
84
10,5
0
100
12,5
0
120
15
0
120
15
0
140
17,5
0
140
17,5
0
160
20
0
160
20
0
160
20
0
185
23
The cylindricity tolerance (blue numbers) refers to the radius (DIN ISO 1101).
Double the tolerance values for measuring the shaft diameter.
For general mechanical engineering, h7 and h8 values are preferable.
FAG | 88
Tables
200
225
225
250
250
280
280
315
315
355
355
400
400
450
450
500
500
560
560
630
630
710
710
800
800
900
900
1000
1000
1120
1120
1250
0
-30
0
-30
0
-35
0
-35
0
-40
0
-40
0
-45
0
-45
0
-50
0
-50
0
-75
0
-75
0
-100
0
-100
0
-125
0
-125
+37
+17
+37
+17
+43
+20
+43
+20
+46
+21
+46
+21
+50
+23
+50
+23
+55
+26
+55
+26
+62
+30
+62
+30
+70
+34
+70
+34
+82
+40
+82
+40
+46
+17
+46
+17
+52
+20
+52
+20
+57
+21
+57
+21
+63
+23
+63
+23
+70
+26
+70
+26
+80
+30
+80
+30
+90
+34
+90
+34
+106
+40
+106
+40
+51
+31
+51
+31
+57
+34
+57
+34
+62
+37
+62
+37
+67
+40
+67
+40
+73
+44
+73
+44
+82
+50
+82
+50
+92
+56
+92
+56
+108
+66
+108
+66
+60
+31
+60
+31
+66
+34
+66
+34
+73
+37
+73
+37
+80
+40
+80
+40
+88
+44
+88
+44
+100
+50
+100
+50
+112
+56
+112
+56
+132
+66
+132
+66
+79
+50
+79
+50
+88
+56
+88
+56
+98
+62
+98
+62
+108
+68
+108
+68
+122
+78
+122
+78
+138
+88
+138
+88
+156
+100
+156
+100
+186
+120
+186
+120
+96
+50
+96
+50
+108
+56
+108
+56
+119
+62
+119
+62
+131
+68
+131
+68
+148
+78
+148
+78
+168
+88
+168
+88
+190
+100
+190
+100
+225
+120
+225
+120
+109
+80
+113
+84
+126
+94
+130
+98
+144
+108
+150
+114
+166
+126
+172
+132
+194
+150
+199
+155
+225
+175
+235
+185
+266
+210
+276
+220
+316
+250
+326
+260
+126
+80
+130
+84
+146
+94
+150
+98
+165
+108
+171
+114
+189
+126
+195
+132
+220
+150
+225
+155
+255
+175
+265
+185
+300
+210
+310
+220
+355
+250
+365
+260
+159
+130
+169
+140
+190
+158
+202
+170
+226
+190
+244
+208
+272
+232
+292
+252
+324
+280
+354
+310
+390
+340
+430
+380
+486
+430
+526
+470
+586
+520
+646
+580
+176
+130
+186
+140
+210
+158
+222
+170
+247
+190
+265
+208
+295
+232
+315
+252
+350
+280
+380
+310
+420
+340
+460
+380
+520
+430
+560
+470
+625
+520
+685
+580
0
46
10
0
46
10
0
52
11,5
0
52
11,5
0
57
12,5
0
57
12,5
0
63
13,5
0
63
13,5
0
70
14,5
0
70
14,5
0
80
16
0
80
16
0
90
18
0
90
18
0
105
21
0
105
21
0
72
10
0
72
10
0
81
11,5
0
81
11,5
0
89
12,5
0
89
12,5
0
97
13,5
0
97
13,5
0
110
14,5
0
110
14,5
0
125
16
0
125
16
0
140
18
0
140
18
0
165
21
0
165
21
0
115
14.5
0
115
14.5
0
130
16
0
130
16
0
140
18
0
140
18
0
155
20
0
155
20
0
175
22
0
175
22
0
200
25
0
200
25
0
230
28
0
230
28
0
260
33
0
260
33
0
185
23
0
185
23
0
210
26
0
210
26
0
230
28,5
0
230
28,5
0
250
31,5
0
250
31,5
0
280
35
0
280
35
0
320
40
0
320
40
0
360
45
0
360
45
0
420
52,5
0
420
52,5
89 | FAG
Tables
7.4 Housing Tolerances

Dimensions in mm
Nomin. housing over
bore diameter to
6
10
10
18
18
30
30
50
50
65
65
80
80
100
100
120
120
140
140
160
160
180
180
200
200
225
0
13
0
13
0
15
0
15
0
18
0
18
0
25
0
30
0
30

Bearing outside dia.
Deviation Dmp
0
8
0
8
0
9
0
11
Diagram of fit
Housing
Bearing
Housing tolerance in microns
D 10
+98
+40
+120
+50
+149
+65
+180
+80
+220
+100
+220
+100
+260
+120
+260
+120
+305
+145
+305
+145
+305
+145
+355
+170
+355
+170
E8
+47
+25
+59
+32
+73
+40
+89
+50
+106
+60
+106
+60
+126
+72
+126
+72
+148
+85
+148
+85
+148
+85
+172
+100
+172
+100
F7
+28
+13
+34
+16
+41
+20
+50
+25
+60
+30
+60
+30
+71
+36
+71
+36
+83
+43
+83
+43
+83
+43
+96
+50
+96
+50
G6
+14
+5
+17
+6
+20
+7
+25
+9
+29
+10
+29
+10
+34
+12
+34
+12
+39
+14
+39
+14
+39
+14
+44
+15
+44
+15
G7
+20
+5
+24
+6
+28
+7
+34
+9
+40
+10
+40
+10
+47
+12
+47
+12
+54
+14
+54
+14
+54
+14
+61
+15
+61
+15
H5
+6
0
+8
0
+9
0
+11
0
+13
0
+13
0
+15
0
+15
0
+18
0
+18
0
+18
0
+20
0
+20
0
H6
+9
0
+11
0
+13
0
+16
0
+19
0
+19
0
+22
0
+22
0
+25
0
+25
0
+25
0
+29
0
+29
0
H7
+15
0
+18
0
+21
0
+25
0
+30
0
+30
0
+35
0
+35
0
+40
0
+40
0
+40
0
+46
0
+46
0
H8
+22
0
+27
0
+33
0
+39
0
+46
0
+46
0
+54
0
+54
0
+63
0
+63
0
+63
0
+72
0
+72
0
J6
+5
4
+6
5
+8
5
+10
6
+13
6
+13
6
+16
6
+16
6
+18
7
+18
7
+18
7
+22
7
+22
7
J7
+8
7
+10
8
+12
9
+14
11
+18
12
+18
12
+22
13
+22
13
+26
14
+26
14
+26
14
+30
16
+30
16
JS 4
+2
2
+2,5
2,5
+3
3
+3,5
3,5
+4
4
+4
4
+5
5
+5
5
+6
6
+6
6
+6
6
+7
7
+7
7
JS 5
+3
3
+4
4
+4,5
4,5
+5,5
5,5
+6,5
6,5
+6,5
6,5
+7,5
7,5
+7,5
7,5
+9
9
+9
9
+9
9
+10
10
+10
10
JS 6
+4,5
4,5
+5,5
5,5
+6,5
6,5
+8
8
+9,5
9,5
+9,5
9,5
+11
11
+11
11
+12,5
12,5
+12,5
12,5
+12,5
12,5
+14,5
14,5
+14,5
14,5
JS 7
+7,5
7,5
+9
9
+10,5
10,5
+12,5
12,5
+15
15
+15
15
+17,5
17,5
+17,5
17,5
+20
20
+20
20
+20
20
+23
23
+23
23
K4
+0,5
3,5
+1
4
0
6
+1
6
+1
7
+1
7
+1
9
+1
9
+1
11
+1
11
+1
11
0
14
0
14
K5
+1
5
+2
6
+1
8
+2
9
+3
10
+3
10
+2
13
+2
13
+3
15
+3
15
+3
15
+2
18
+2
18
K6
+2
7
+2
9
+2
11
+3
13
+4
15
+4
15
+4
18
+4
18
+4
21
+4
21
+4
21
+5
24
+5
24
FAG | 90
Tables
225
250
250
280
280
315
315
355
355
400
400
450
450
500
500
560
560
630
630
710
710
800
800
900
900
1000
1000
1120
1120
1250
1250
1400
0
-30
0
-35
0
-35
0
-40
0
-40
0
-45
0
-45
0
-50
0
-50
0
-75
0
-75
0
-100
0
-100
0
-125
0
-125
0
160
+355
+170
+400
+190
+400
+190
+440
+210
+440
+210
+480
+230
+480
+230
+540
+260
+540
+260
+610
+290
+610
+290
+680
+320
+680
+320
+770
+350
+770
+350
+890
+390
+172
+100
+191
+110
+191
+110
+214
+125
+214
+125
+232
+135
+232
+135
+255
+145
+255
+145
+285
+160
+285
+160
+310
+170
+310
+170
+360
+195
+360
+195
+415
+220
+96
+50
+108
+56
+108
+56
+119
+62
+119
+62
+131
+68
+131
+68
+144
+76
+144
+76
+160
+80
+160
+80
+176
+86
+176
+86
+203
+98
+203
+98
+235
+110
+44
+15
+49
+17
+49
+17
+54
+18
+54
+18
+60
+20
+60
+20
+66
+22
+66
+22
+74
+24
+74
+24
+82
+26
+82
+26
+94
+28
+94
+28
+108
+30
+61
+15
+69
+17
+69
+17
+75
+18
+75
+18
+83
+20
+83
+20
+92
+22
+92
+22
+104
+24
+104
+24
+116
+26
+116
+26
+133
+28
+133
+28
+155
+30
+20
0
+23
0
+23
0
+25
0
+25
0
+27
0
+27
0
+29
0
+32
0
+32
0
+36
0
+36
0
+40
0
+40
0
+44
0
+44
0
+50
0
+50
0
+56
0
+56
0
+66
0
+66
0
+78
0
+46
0
+52
0
+52
0
+57
0
+57
0
+63
0
+63
0
+70
0
+70
0
+80
0
+80
0
+90
0
+90
0
+105
0
+105
0
+125
0
+72
0
+81
0
+81
0
+89
0
+89
0
+97
0
+97
0
+110
0
+110
0
+125
0
+125
0
+140
0
+140
0
+165
0
+165
0
+195
0
+22
7
+25
7
+25
7
+29
7
+29
7
+33
7
+33
7
+30
16
+36
16
+36
16
+39
18
+39
18
+43
20
+43
20
+7
7
+8
8
+8
8
+9
9
+9
9
+10
10
+10
10
+10
10
+11,5
11,5
+11,5
11,5
+12,5
12,5
+12,5
12,5
+13,5
13,5
+13,5
13,5
+14,5
14,5
+16
16
+16
16
+18
18
+18
18
+20
20
+20
20
+22
22
+22
22
+25
25
+25
25
+28
28
+28
28
+33
33
+33
33
+39
39
+23
23
+26
26
+26
26
+28,5
28,5
+28,5
28,5
+31,5
31,5
+31,5
31,5
+35
35
+35
35
+40
40
+40
40
+45
45
+45
45
+52
52
+52
52
+62
62
0
14
0
16
0
16
0
17
0
17
0
20
0
20
+2
18
+3
20
+3
20
+3
22
+3
22
+2
25
+2
25
+5
24
+5
27
+5
27
+7
29
+7
29
+8
32
+8
32
0
44
0
44
0
50
0
50
0
56
0
56
0
66
0
66
0
78
91 | FAG
Tables
7.4 Housing Tolerances (continuation)

Dimensions in mm
Nomin. housing over
bore diameter to
6
10
10
18
18
30
30
50
50
65
65
80
80
100
100
120
120
140
140
160
160
180
180
200
200
225
0
13
0
13
0
15
0
15
0
18
0
18
0
25
0
30
0
30

Bearing outside dia.
Deviation Dmp
0
8
0
8
0
9
0
11
Diagram of fit
Housing
Bearing
Housing tolerance in microns
K7
+5
-10
+6
-12
+6
-15
+7
-18
+9
-21
+9
-21
+10
-25
+10
-25
+12
-28
+12
-28
+12
-28
+13
-33
+13
-33
M6
-3
-12
-4
-15
-4
-17
-4
-20
-5
-24
-5
-24
-6
-28
-6
-28
-8
-33
-8
-33
-8
-33
-8
-37
-8
-37
M7
0
-15
0
-18
0
-21
0
-25
0
-30
0
-30
0
-35
0
-35
0
-40
0
-40
0
-40
0
-46
0
-46
N6
-7
-16
-9
-20
-11
-24
-12
-28
-14
-33
-14
-33
-16
-38
-16
-38
-20
-45
-20
-45
-20
-45
-22
-51
-22
-51
N7
-4
-19
-5
-23
-7
-28
-8
-33
-9
-39
-9
-39
-10
-45
-10
-45
-12
-52
-12
-52
-12
-52
-14
-60
-14
-60
P6
-12
-21
-15
-26
-18
-31
-21
-37
-26
-45
-26
-45
-30
-52
-30
-52
-36
-61
-36
-61
-36
-61
-41
-70
-41
-70
P7
-9
-24
-11
-29
-14
-35
-17
-42
-21
-51
-21
-51
-24
-59
-24
-59
-28
-68
-28
-68
-28
-68
-33
-79
-33
-79
R6
-16
-25
-20
-31
-24
-37
-29
-45
-35
-54
-37
-56
-44
-66
-47
-69
-56
-81
-58
-83
-61
-86
-68
-97
-71
-100
S6
-20
-29
-25
-36
-31
-44
-38
-54
-47
-66
-53
-72
-64
-86
-72
-94
-85
-110
-93
-118
-101
-126
-113
-142
-121
-150
FAG | 92
Tables
225
250
250
280
280
315
315
355
355
400
400
450
450
500
500
560
560
630
630
710
710
800
800
900
900
1000
1000
1120
1120
1250
1250
1400
0
-30
0
-35
0
-35
0
-40
0
-40
0
-45
0
-45
0
-50
0
-50
0
-75
0
-75
0
-100
0
-100
0
-125
0
-125
0
160
+13
-33
+16
-36
+16
-36
+17
-40
+17
-40
+18
-45
+18
-45
0
-70
0
-70
0
-80
0
-80
0
-90
0
-90
0
-105
0
-105
0
-125
-8
-37
-9
-41
-9
-41
-10
-46
-10
-46
-10
-50
-10
-50
-26
-70
-26
-70
-30
-80
-30
-80
-34
-90
-34
-90
-40
-106
-40
-106
-48
-126
0
-46
0
-52
0
-52
0
-57
0
-57
0
-63
0
-63
-22
-51
-25
-57
-25
-57
-26
-62
-26
-62
-27
-67
-27
-67
-44
-88
-44
-88
-50
-100
-50
-100
-56
-112
-56
-112
-66
-132
-66
-132
-78
-156
-14
-60
-14
-66
-14
-66
-16
-73
-16
-73
-17
-80
-17
-80
-41
-70
-47
-79
-47
-79
-51
-87
-51
-87
-55
-95
-55
-95
-78
-122
-78
-122
-88
-138
-88
-138
-100
-156
-100
-156
-120
-186
-120
-186
-140
-218
-33
-79
-36
-88
-36
-88
-41
-98
-41
-98
-45
-108
-45
-108
-78
-148
-78
-148
-88
-168
-88
-168
-100
-190
-100
-190
-120
-225
-120
-225
-140
-265
-75
-104
-85
-117
-89
-121
-97
-133
-103
-139
-113
-153
-119
-159
-150
-194
-155
-199
-175
-225
-185
-235
-210
-266
-220
-276
-250
-316
-260
-326
-300
-378
-131
-160
-149
-181
-161
-193
-179
-215
-197
-233
-219
-259
-239
-279
93 | FAG
Tables
7.5 Normal Tolerances of FAG Radial Bearings

(Except Tapered Roller Bearings)
Inner ring
Dimensions in mm
Nominal bore
diameter d
over 2,5
to
10
10
18
18
30
30
50
50
80
80
120
120
180
180
250
250
315
315
400
400
500
500
630
630
800
800 1000
1000 1250
0
75
0
0
100 125
Tolerance class PN (normal tolerance)

Tolerance in microns
Bore, cylindrical
Deviation dmp
Variation
Vdp
Variation
0
8
0
8
0
10
0
12
0
15
0
20
0
25
0
30
0
35
0
40
0
45
0
50
diameter
series 7 8 9 10
10
13
15
19
25
31
38
44
50
56
63
01
10
12
19
25
31
38
44
50
56
63
234
11
15
19
23
26
30
34
38
Vdmp
11
15
19
23
26
30
34
38
+15
0
+18
0
+21
0
+25
0
+30
0
+35
0
+40
0
+46
0
+52
0
+57
0
+63
0
+70
0
+80
0
+90
0
+105
0
+30
0
+35
0
+40
0
+46
0
+52
0
+57
0
+63
0
+70
0
+80
0
+90
0
+105
0
+100 +125
0
0
Bore, taper 1:12

Deviation dmp
Deviation
d1mp
dmp
+15
0
+18
0
+21
0
+25
0
Variation
Vdp
10
10
13
15
Bore, taper 1:30

Deviation dmp
19
25
31
38
44
50
56
+15
0
+20
0
+25
0
+30
0
+35
0
+40
0
+45
0
+50
0
+75
0
+100 +100 +115

0
0
0
Deviation
d1mp
dmp
+35
0
+40
0
+50
0
+55
0
+60
0
+65
0
+75
0
+85
0
Variation
Vdp
19
25
31
38
44
50
56
63
Width
deviation
Bs
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
120 120 120 120 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 750 1000 1250
Width
variation
VBs
15
20
20
20
25
25
30
30
35
40
50
60
70
80
100
Kia
10
10
13
15
20
25
30
40
50
60
65
70
80
90
100
Radial
runout
Bore diameter
dmp
d1mp
Vdp
Vdmp
Single plane mean bore diameter deviation

Deviation of mean large diameter from nominal dimension (tapered bore)
Bore diameter variation in a single radial plane
Mean bore diameter variation; difference between maximum and minimum mean
bore diameter
Outside diameter
Dmp
VDp
VDmp
FAG | 94
Single plane mean outside diameter deviation

Outside diameter variation in a single radial plane
Mean outside diameter variation; difference between maximum and minimum mean outside diameter
Tables
Outer ring
Dimensions in mm
Nominal
outside
diameter D
over 6
to 18
18
30
30
50
50
80
80
120
120
150
150
180
180
250
250
315
315
400
400
500
500
630
630
800
800 1000 1250

1000 1250 1600

Deviation
Dmp
0
8
0
9
0
11
0
13
0
15
0
18
0
25
0
30
0
35
0
40
0
45
0
50
0
75
0
0
0
100 125 160
Variation
VDp
diameter
series 789 10
12
14
16
19
23
31
38
44
50
56
63
94
125
01
11
13
19
23
31
38
44
50
56
63
94
125
234
10
11
14
19
23
26
30
34
38
55
75
sealed bearings 234 10
12
16
20
26
30
38
Variation
VDmp
10
11
14
19
23
26
30
34
38
55
75
Radial
runout
Kea
15
15
20
25
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
100
120
140
160
190
The width tolerances Cs and VCs are identical to Bs and VBs for the pertinent inner ring.
Width
B, Cs Deviation of a single ring width (inner and outer ring) from nominal dimension
VBs, VCs Variation of inner ring width and outer ring width
Running accuracy
Kia
Kea
Radial runout of assembled bearing inner ring

Radial runout of assembled bearing outer ring
95 | FAG
Tables
7.6 Normal Tolerances of FAG Tapered Roller Bearings

in Metric Dimensions
Cone
Dimensions in mm
Nominal bore over
diameter d
to
10
18
18
30
30
50
50
80
80
120
120
180
180
250
250
315
315
400
400
500
500
630
0
15
0
20
0
25
0
30
0
35
0
40
0
45
0
50
45
50
0
450
0
500

Deviation
dmp
0
12
Variation
Vdp
12
12
12
15
20
25
30
35
40
Vdmp
11
15
19
23
26
30
Bs
0
120
0
120
0
120
0
150
0
200
0
250
0
300
0
350
0
400
Width
deviation
0
12
0
12
Radial runout Kia
15
18
20
25
30
35
50
60
70
70
85
Width
deviation
+200
0
+200
0
+200
0
+200
0
+200
200
+350
250
+350
250
+350
250
+400
400
+400
400
+500
500
T1s
+100
0
+100
0
+100
0
+100
0
+100
100
+150
150
+150
150
+150
150
+200
200
T2s
+100
0
+100
0
+100
0
+100
0
+100
100
+200
100
+200
100
+200
100
+200
200
80
120
120
150
150
180
180
250
250
315
315
400
400
500
500
630
630
800
800
1000
0
18
0
20
0
25
0
30
0
35
0
40
0
45
0
50
0
75
0
100
75
100
120
120
Ts
Cup
Dimensions in mm
Nominal
outside
diameter D
over
to
18
30
30
50
50
80

Deviation
Dmp
0
12
0
14
Variation
VDp
12
14
16
18
20
25
30
35
40
45
50
VDmp
11
12
14
15
19
23
26
30
34
38
18
20
25
35
40
45
50
60
70
80
100
Radial runout Kea
0
16
The width tolerance Cs is identical with Bs for the pertinent inner ring.
Ts
Overall width of a tapered roller bearing, measured at a single position
Overall width of a tapered roller bearing, measured at a single position by cone and master cup
T1s
T2s
Overall width of a tapered roller bearing, measured at a single position by cup and master cone
TS = TsT, T1S = T1sT1, T2s = T2sT2 Deviation of a single tapered roller bearing overall width from nominal dimension
Hs, H1s, H2s, H3s, H4s Overall thrust bearing height measured at a single position
Hs = HsH, H1s = H1sH1, H2s = H2sH2.... Deviation of a single overall thrust bearing height from nominal dimension
H
Overall height of a single direction thrust bearing
Overall height of a single direction thrust bearing with seating ring
H1
H2
Overall height of a double direction thrust bearing
H3
Overall height of a double direction thrust bearing with seating rings
Overall height of a spherical roller thrust bearing
H4
FAG | 96
Tables
7.7 Normal Tolerances of FAG Thrust Bearings

Shaft washer
Dimensions in mm
Nominal bore
diameter dw
over
to
18
18
30
30
50
50
80
80
120
120
180
180
250
250
315
315
400
400
500
500
630
630
800
800
1000
1000
1250
0
75
0
100
0
125

Deviation
dmp 0
8
0
10
0
12
0
15
0
20
0
25
0
30
0
35
0
40
0
45
0
50
Variation
Vdp
11
15
19
23
26
30
34
38
Wall thickness
variation
Si*)
10
10
10
10
15
15
20
25
30
30
35
40
45
50
du
+70
0
+70
0
+85
0
+100
0
+120
0
+140
0
+140
0
+160
0
+180
0
+180
0
80
120
120
180
180
250
250
315
315
400
400
500
500
630
630
800
800
1000
1000
1250
1250
1600
0
25
0
30
0
35
0
40
0
45
0
50
0
75
0
100
0
125
0
160
55
75
Seating ring
deviation
Housing washer
Dimensions in mm
Nominal
outside
diameter
Dg
over 18
to
30
30
50
50
80

Deviation
Dmp 0
13
Variation
VDp
10
12
14
17
19
23
26
30
34
38
Du
0
30
0
35
0
45
0
60
0
75
0
90
0
105
0
120
0
135
0
180
Seating ring
deviation
0
16
0
19
0
22
*) The values of the wall thickness variation apply to shaft and housing washers
Construction Heights of Thrust Bearings

Dimensions in mm
Nominal bore
diameter dw
over
to
30
30
50
50
80
80
120
120
180
180
250
250
315
315
400
400
500
500
630
630
800
800
1000
1000
1250
Tolerance classes PN ... P4

Deviation
Hs
+20
250
+20
250
+20
300
+25
300
+25
400
+30
400
+40
400
+40
500
+50
500
+60
600
+70
750
+80
+100
1000 1400
H1s +100
250
+100
250
+100
300
+150
300
+150
400
+150
400
+200
400
+200
500
+300
500
+350
600
+400
750
+450 +500
1000 1400
H2s +150
400
+150
400
+150
500
+200
500
+200
600
+250
600
+350
700
+350
700
+400
900
+500 +600 +700 +900

1100 1300 1500 1800
H3s +300
400
+300
400
+300
500
+400
500
+400
600
+500
600
+600
700
+600
700
+750
900
+900 +1100 +1300 +1600

1100 1300 1500 1800
H4s +20
300
+20
300
+20
400
+25
400
+25
500
+30
500
+40
700
+40
700
+50
900
+60
+70
+80
+100
1200 1400 1800 2400
97 | FAG
Tables
7.8 Limit Dimensions of Chamfer
Symbols
r1s, r3s
chamfer in radial direction
r2s, r4s
chamfer in axial direction
rsmin
general symbol for the minimum chamfer r1smin, r2smin, r3smin, r4smin
r1smax, r3smax
maximum chamfer in radial direction
r2smax, r4smax
maximum chamfer in axial direction
Chamfer of radial bearings (except tapered roller bearings)

Dimensions in mm
0,1
0,15 0,2
rsmin
Nominal bore
diameter d
over
to
0,3
0,6
40
1
40
40
40
1,1
1,5
50
50
120
120
120
120
r1smax
0,2
0,3
0,5
0,6
0,8
1,3
1,5
1,9
2,5
2,3
r2smax
0,4
0,6
0,8
3,5
250
120
120
250
250
120
120
250
Chamfer of tapered roller bearings in metric dimensions

Cone
Dimensions in mm
0,3
0,6
rsmin
Nominal bore
diameter d
over
to
40
40
1,5
40
50
40
50
r1smax
0,7
0,9
1,1
1,3
1,6
1,9
2,3
2,8
3,5
2,8
3,5
r2smax
1,4
1,6
1,7
2,5
3,5
4,5
250
120
120
250
250
120
120
250
Cup
Dimensions in mm
0,3
0,6
rsmin
Nominal
outside diameter D
over
to
40
40
1,5
40
50
40
50
r3smax
0,7
0,9
1,1
1,3
1,6
1,9
2,3
2,8
3,5
2,8
3,5
r4smax
1,4
1,6
1,7
2,5
3,5
4,5
Chamfer of thrust bearings

rsmin
Dimensions in mm
0,1 0,15 0,2 0,3
0,6
1,1
1,5
2,1
7,5
9,5
12
15
19
r1smax, r2smax
0,2
1,5
2,2
2,7
3,5
4,5
5,5
6,5
10
12,5 15
18
21
25
FAG | 98
0,3
0,5
0,8
Tables
Radial bearings
r1smax
rsmin
r1s
220
r1smax
rsmin
280
r1s
Dg
r2smax
3
280
100
100
280
rsmin
r1smax
rsmin
r1s
2,5
280
r2smax
r2s
rsmin
r1smax
rsmin
r2s
D
2,1
80
220
rsmin
r1s
r2smax
2
80
r3s
Thrust bearings
r4smax
r4s
rsmin
r3smax
r1smax
rsmin
rsmin
r2s
Tapered roller bearings
r2smax
r2s
rsmin
dw
rsmin
r2s
r1s
r2smax
7,5
9,5
12
15
19
280
280
3,5
3,8
4,5
3,8
4,5
5,5
6,5
10
12,5
15
18
21
25
4,5
6,5
10
13
17
19
24
30
38
250
120
250
250
400
400
120
250
250
400
400
120
120
250
3,5
4,5
4,5
5,5
5,5
6,5
6,5
7,5
7,5
5,5
5,5
6,5
7,5
7,5
8,5
10
11
2,5
3
120
2,5
4
120
3
250
5
180
4
250
400
400
5
250
400
400
120
250
3,5
4,5
4,5
5,5
5,5
6,5
6,5
7,5
7,5
5,5
5,5
6,5
7,5
7,5
8,5
10
11
120
120
250
180
180
120
120
120
250
6
180
180
180
180
180
99 | FAG
Tables
7.9 Radial Clearance of FAG Deep Groove Ball Bearings
Dimensions in mm
Nominal bore
diameter
over
to
2,5
6
6
10
10
18
18
24
24
30
30
40
40
50
50
65
65
80
80
100
100
120
120
140
140
160
160
180
180
200
Bearing clearance in microns

Clearance
group C2
min
max
0
7
0
7
0
9
0
10
1
11
1
11
1
11
1
15
1
15
1
18
2
20
2
23
2
23
2
25
2
30
Clearance
min
group CN (norm.) max
2
13
2
13
3
18
5
20
5
20
6
20
6
23
8
28
10
30
12
36
15
41
18
48
18
53
20
61
25
71
Clearance
group C3
min
max
8
23
8
23
11
25
13
28
13
28
15
33
18
36
23
43
25
51
30
58
36
66
41
81
46
91
53
102
63
117
Clearance
group C4
min
max
14
29
18
33
20
36
23
41
28
46
30
51
38
61
46
71
53
84
61
97
71
114
81
130
91
147
107
163
Dimensions in mm
Nominal bore
diameter
over
to
200
225
225
250
250
280
280
315
315
355
355
400
400
450
450
500
500
560
560
630
630
710
710
800
800
900
900 1000 1120

1000 1120 1250

Clearance
group C2
min
max
4
32
4
36
4
39
8
45
8
50
8
60
10
70
10
80
20
90
20
100
30
120
30
130
30
150
40
160
40
170
40
180
Clearance
min
28
82
31
92
36
97
42
110
50
120
60
140
70
160
80
180
90
200
100
220
120
250
130
280
150
310
160
340
170
370
180
400
Clearance
group C3
min
max
73
132
87
152
97
162
110
180
120
200
140
230
160
260
180
290
200
320
220
350
250
390
280
440
310
490
340
540
370
590
400
640
Clearance
group C4
min
max
120
187
140
217
152
237
175
260
200
290
230
330
260
370
290
410
320
460
350
510
390
560
440
620
490
690
540
760
590
840
640
910
FAG | 100
Tables
7.10 Radial Clearance of FAG Self-Aligning Ball Bearings
Dimensions in mm
Nominal bore
diameter
over
to
2,5
6
6
10
10
14
14
18
18
24
24
30
30
40
40
50
50
65
65
80
80
100
100
120
120
140
140
160
with cylindrical bore

Clearance
group C2
min
max
1
8
2
9
2
10
3
12
4
14
5
16
6
18
6
19
7
21
8
24
9
27
10
31
10
38
15
44
Clearance
min
5
15
6
17
6
19
8
21
19
23
11
24
13
29
14
31
16
36
18
40
22
48
25
56
30
68
35
80
Clearance
group C3
min
max
10
20
12
25
13
26
15
28
17
30
19
35
23
40
25
44
30
50
35
60
42
70
50
83
60
100
70
120
Clearance
group C4
min
max
15
25
19
33
21
35
23
37
25
39
29
46
34
53
37
57
45
69
54
83
64
96
75
114
90
135
110
161
min
max
7
17
9
20
12
24
14
27
18
32
23
39
29
47
35
56
40
68
45
74
Clearance
min
13
26
15
28
19
35
22
39
27
47
35
57
42
68
50
81
60
98
65
110
Clearance
group C3
min
max
20
33
23
39
29
46
33
52
41
61
50
75
62
90
75
108
90
130
100
150
Clearance
group C4
min
max
28
42
33
50
40
59
45
65
56
80
69
98
84
116
100
139
120
165
140
191
with tapered bore

Clearance
group C2
101 | FAG
Tables
7.11 Radial Clearance of FAG Cylindrical Roller Bearings
Dimensions in mm
Nominal bore
diameter
over
to
24
24
30
30
40
40
50
50
65
65
80
80
100
100
120
120
140
140
160
160
180
180
200
200
225
225
250

Clearance
group C1NA1)
min
max
5
15
5
15
5
15
5
18
5
20
10
25
10
30
10
30
10
35
10
35
10
40
15
45
15
50
15
50
Clearance
group C2
min
max
0
25
0
25
5
30
5
35
10
40
10
45
15
50
15
55
15
60
20
70
25
75
35
90
45
105
45
110
Clearance
min
20
45
20
45
25
50
30
60
40
70
40
75
50
85
50
90
60
105
70
120
75
125
90
145
105
165
110
175
Clearance
group C3
min
max
35
60
35
60
45
70
50
80
60
90
65
100
75
110
85
125
100
145
115
165
120
170
140
195
160
220
170
235
Clearance
group C4
min
max
50
75
50
75
60
85
70
100
80
110
90
125
105
140
125
165
145
190
165
215
170
220
195
250
220
280
235
300
with tapered bore

Clearance
group C1NA1)
min
max
10
20
15
25
15
25
17
30
20
35
25
40
35
55
40
60
45
70
50
75
55
85
60
90
60
95
65
100
Clearance
group C2
min
max
15
40
20
45
20
45
25
55
30
60
35
70
40
75
50
90
55
100
60
110
75
125
85
140
95
155
105
170
Clearance
min
30
55
35
60
40
65
45
75
50
80
60
95
70
105
90
130
100
145
110
160
125
175
140
195
155
215
170
235
Clearance
group C3
min
max
40
65
45
70
55
80
60
90
70
100
85
120
95
130
115
155
130
175
145
195
160
210
180
235
200
260
220
285
Clearance
group C4
min
max
50
75
55
80
70
95
75
105
90
120
110
145
120
155
140
180
160
205
180
230
195
245
220
275
245
305
270
335
FAG | 102
Tables
250
280
280
315
315
355
355
400
400
450
450
500
500
560
560
630
630
710
710
800
800
900
900 1000 1120 1250 1400 1600 1800

1000 1120 1250 1400 1600 1800 2000
20
55
20
60
20
65
25
75
25
85
25
95
25
100
30
110
30
130
35
140
35
160
35
180
50
200
60
220
60
240
70
270
80
300
100
320
55
125
55
130
65
145
100
190
110
210
110
220
120
240
140
260
145
285
150
310
180
350
200
390
220
430
230
470
270
530
330
610
380
700
400
760
125
195
130
205
145
225
190
280
210
310
220
330
240
360
260
380
285
425
310
470
350
520
390
580
430
640
470
710
530
790
610
890
700 760
1020 1120
190
260
200
275
225
305
280
370
310
410
330
440
360
480
380
500
425
565
470
630
520
690
580
770
640
850
710
950
790 890 1020 1120

1050 1170 1340 1480
260
330
275
350
305
385
370
460
410
510
440
550
480
600
500
620
565
705
630
790
690
860
770
960
850 950 1050 1170 1340 1480

1060 1190 1310 1450 1660 1840
75
110
80
120
90
135
100
150
110
170
120
190
130
210
140
230
160
260
170
290
190
330
210
360
230
400
250
440
270
460
300
500
320
530
115
185
130
205
145
225
165
255
185
285
205
315
230
350
260
380
295
435
325
485
370
540
410
600
455
665
490
730
550
810
640
920
700 760
1020 1120
185
255
205
280
225
305
255
345
285
385
315
425
350
470
380
500
435
575
485
645
540
710
600
790
665
875
730
970
810 920 1020 1120

1070 1200 1340 1480
240
310
265
340
290
370
330
420
370
470
410
520
455
575
500
620
565
705
630
790
700
870
780
970
865 960 1070 1200 1340 1480

1075 1200 1330 1480 1660 1840
295
365
325
400
355
435
405
495
455
555
505
615
560
680
620
740
695
835
775
935
860 960 1065 1200 1330 1480 1660 1840

1030 1150 1275 1440 1590 1760 1980 2200
340
560
1) Clearance group C1NA applies to single and double row cylindrical roller bearings of tolerance classes SP and UP.
103 | FAG
Tables
7.12 Radial Clearance of FAG Spherical Roller Bearings
Dimensions in mm
Nominal bore
diameter
over
to
24
24
30
30
40
40
50
50
65
65
80
80
100
100
120
120
140
140
160
160
180
180
200
200
225
225
250

Clearance
group C2
min
max
10
20
15
25
15
30
20
35
20
40
30
50
35
60
40
75
50
95
60
110
65
120
70
130
80
140
90
150
Clearance
min
20
35
25
40
30
45
35
55
40
65
50
80
60
100
75
120
95
145
110
170
120
180
130
200
140
220
150
240
Clearance
group C3
min
max
35
45
40
55
45
60
55
75
65
90
80
110
100
135
120
160
145
190
170
220
180
240
200
260
220
290
240
320
Clearance
group C4
min
max
45
60
55
75
60
80
75
100
90
120
110
145
135
180
160
210
190
240
220
280
240
310
260
340
290
380
320
420
with tapered bore

Clearance
group C2
min
max
15
25
20
30
25
35
30
45
40
55
50
70
55
80
65
100
80
120
90
130
100
140
110
160
120
180
140
200
Clearance
min
25
35
30
40
35
50
45
60
55
75
70
95
80
110
100
130
120
160
130
180
140
200
160
220
180
250
200
270
Clearance
group C3
min
max
35
45
40
55
50
65
60
80
75
95
95
120
110
140
135
170
160
200
180
230
200
260
220
290
250
320
270
350
Clearance
group C4
min
max
45
60
55
75
65
85
80
100
95
120
120
150
140
180
170
220
200
260
230
300
260
340
290
370
320
410
350
450
FAG | 104
Tables
250
280
280
315
315
355
355
400
400
450
450
500
500
560
560
630
630
710
710
800
800
900
900 1000 1120 1250 1400

1000 1120 1250 1400 1600
100
170
110
190
120
200
130
220
140
240
140
260
150
180
170
310
190
350
210
390
230
430
260
480
290
530
320
580
350
630
380
700
170
260
190
280
200
310
220
340
240
370
260
410
180
440
310
480
350
530
390
580
430
650
480
710
530
770
580
840
630
910
700
1020
260
350
280
370
310
410
340
450
370
500
410
550
440
600
480
650
530
700
580
770
650
860
710
930
770 840 910 1020

1050 1140 1240 1390
350
460
370
500
410
550
450
600
500
660
550
720
600
780
650
850
700
920
770 860 930 1050 1140 1240 1390

1010 1120 1220 1430 1560 1700 1890
150
220
170
240
190
270
210
300
230
330
260
370
290
410
320
460
350
510
390
570
440
640
490
710
540
780
220
300
240
330
270
360
300
400
330
440
370
490
410
540
460
600
510
670
570
750
640
840
710
930
780 860 940 1060

1020 1120 1220 1380
300
390
330
430
360
470
400
520
440
570
490
630
540
680
600
760
670
850
750
960
840 930 1020 1120 1220 1380

1070 1190 1300 1420 1550 1750
390
490
430
540
470
590
520
650
570
720
630
790
680
870
760
980
850 960 1070 1190 1300 1420 1550 1750

1090 1220 1370 1520 1650 1800 1960 2200
600
860
660
940
740
1060
105 | FAG
Tables
7.13 Radial Clearance of FAG Barrel Roller Bearings
Dimensions in mm
Nominal bore
diameter
over
to
30
30
40
40
50
50
65
65
80
80
100
100
120
120
140
140
160
160
180
180
225
225
250
250
280
280
315
315
355

Clearance
group C2
min 2
max 9
3
10
3
13
4
15
5
20
7
25
10
30
15
35
20
40
25
45
30
50
35
55
40
60
40
70
45
75
Clearance
min 9
group CN (norm.) max 17
10
20
13
23
15
27
20
35
25
45
30
50
35
55
40
65
45
70
50
75
55
80
60
85
70
100
75
105
Clearance
group C3
min 17
max 28
20
30
23
35
27
40
35
55
45
65
50
70
55
80
65
95
70
100
75
105
80
110
85
115
100
135
105
140
Clearance
group C4
min 28
max 40
30
45
35
50
40
55
55
75
65
90
70
95
80
110
95
125
100
130
105
135
110
140
115
145
135
170
140
175
with tapered bore

Clearance
group C2
min 9
max 17
10
20
13
23
15
27
20
35
25
45
30
50
35
55
40
65
45
70
50
75
55
80
60
85
70
100
75
105
Clearance
min 17
group CN (norm.) max 28
20
30
23
35
27
40
35
55
45
65
50
70
55
80
65
95
70
100
75
105
80
110
85
115
100
135
105
140
Clearance
group C3
min 28
max 40
30
45
35
50
40
55
55
75
65
90
70
95
80
110
95
125
100
130
105
135
110
140
115
145
135
170
140
175
Clearance
group C4
min 40
max 55
45
60
50
65
55
75
75
95
90
120
95
125
110
140
125
155
130
160
135
165
140
170
145
175
170
205
175
210
FAG | 106
Tables
7.14 Axial Clearance of FAG Double Row Angular Contact

Ball Bearings
Series 32, 32B, 33 and 33B
Dimensions in mm
Nominal bore over
diameter
to
6
10
10
18
18
24
Clearance
group C2
min
max
1
11
1
12
2
14
Clearance
min
5
21
6
23
Clearance
group C3
min
max
12
28
Clearance
group C4
min
max
25
45
24
30
30
40
40
50
50
65
65
80
80
100
100
120
120
140
2
15
2
16
2
18
3
22
3
24
3
26
4
30
4
34
7
25
8
27
9
29
11
33
13
36
15
40
18
46
22
53
25
59
13
31
16
34
18
37
21
40
23
44
26
48
30
54
35
63
42
73
48
82
27
47
28
48
30
50
33
54
36
58
40
63
46
71
55
83
65
96
74
108
Series 32DA and 33 DA

Clearance
group C2
min
max
5
22
6
24
7
25
8
27
9
29
11
33
13
36
15
40
18
46
22
53
25
59
Clearance
min
11
28
13
31
14
32
16
35
18
38
22
44
25
48
29
54
35
63
42
73
48
82
Clearance
group C3
20
37
23
41
24
42
27
46
30
50
36
58
40
63
46
71
55
83
65
96
74
108
min
max
107 | FAG
Tables
7.15 Axial Clearance of FAG Four-Point Bearings
Dimensions in mm
Nominal bore
diameter
over
to
18
18
40
40
60
60
80
80
100
100
140
140
180
180
220
220
260
260
300
300
355
355
400
400
450
450
500

Clearance
group C2
min
max
20
60
30
70
40
90
50
100
60
120
70
140
80
160
100
180
120
200
140
220
160
240
180
270
200
290
220
310
Clearance
min
50
90
60
110
80
130
90
140
100
160
120
180
140
200
160
220
180
240
200
280
220
300
250
330
270
360
290
390
Clearance
group C3
min
max
80
120
100
150
120
170
130
180
140
200
160
220
180
240
200
260
220
300
260
340
280
360
310
390
340
430
370
470
Nominal bore
diameter
over
to
500
560
710
800
800
900
900
1000
Clearance
group C2
min
max
240
330
260
360
280
390
300
420
330
460
360
500
Clearance
min
310
420
340
450
370
490
400
540
440
590
480
630
Clearance
group C3
400
510
430
550
470
590
520
660
570
730
620
780
Dimensions in mm
560
630
630
710
FAG | 108
min
max
Tables
7.16 Radial Clearance Reduction of FAG Cylindrical Roller Bearings

with Tapered Bore
Nominal bore
diameter
Radial clearance
prior to mounting
Clearance group
CN (normal) C3
min
max min
mm
Reduction
in radial
clearance 1)
d
over
mm
to
24
30
40
30
40
50
0,035 0,06 0,045 0,07

0,04 0,065 0,055 0,08
0,045 0,075 0,06 0,09
0,055 0,08
0,07 0,095
0,075 0,105
50
65
80
65
80
100
0,05
0,06
0,07
0,08 0,07 0,1

0,095 0,085 0,12
0,105 0,095 0,13
0,09
0,11
0,12
100
120
140
120
140
160
0,09
0,1
0,11
0,13 0,115 0,155 0,14

0,145 0,13 0,175 0,16
0,16 0,145 0,195 0,18
160
180
200
180
200
225
0,125 0,175 0,16

0,14 0,195 0,18
0,155 0,215 0,2
225
250
280
Smallest radial
clearance
after mounting
CN
C3
C4
min
min
min
mm
Shaft
min
max
mm
Sleeve
min
max
0,015 0,02
0,02 0,025
0,025 0,03
0,3
0,35
0,4
0,35
0,4
0,45
0,3
0,35
0,45
0,4
0,45
0,5
0,02
0,02
0,02
0,12
0,145
0,155
0,03 0,035
0,035 0,04
0,04 0,045
0,45
0,55
0,6
0,55
0,6
0,7
0,5
0,65
0,65
0,65
0,7
0,8
0,02 0,035 0,05

0,025 0,04 0,07
0,03 0,05 0,075
0,18
0,205
0,23
0,045 0,055
0,055 0,065
0,06 0,075
0,7
0,85
0,9
0,85
1
1,2
0,8
0,95
1
0,95
1,1
1,3
0,045 0,065 0,085

0,045 0,07 0,095
0,05 0,075 0,105
0,21 0,195 0,245

0,235 0,22 0,275
0,26 0,245 0,305
0,065 0,085
0,075 0,095
0,085 0,105
1
1,2
1,3
1,3
1,5
1,6
1,1
1,3
1,4
1,5
1,7
1,8
0,06 0,08
0,065 0,09
0,07 0,1
250
280
315
0,17 0,235 0,22 0,285 0,27 0,335

0,185 0,255 0,24 0,31 0,295 0,365
0,205 0,28 0,265 0,34 0,325 0,4
0,095 0,115
0,105 0,125
0,115 0,14
1,5
1,6
1,8
1,8
2
2,2
1,6
1,7
1,9
2
2,3
2,4
0,075 0,105 0,155

0,08 0,125 0,17
0,09 0,13 0,185
315
355
400
355
400
450
0,225 0,305 0,29

0,255 0,345 0,33
0,285 0,385 0,37
0,13
0,14
0,15
0,16
0,17
0,185
2
2,2
2,3
2,5
2,6
2,8
2,2
2,5
2,6
2,7
2,9
3,1
0,095 0,14 0,195

0,115 0,165 0,235
0,135 0,19 0,27
450
500
560
500
560
630
0,315 0,425 0,41 0,52 0,505 0,615

0,35 0,47 0,455 0,575 0,56 0,68
0,38 0,5
0,5
0,62 0,62 0,74
0,16 0,195
0,17 0,215
0,185 0,24
2,5
2,7
2,9
3
3,4
3,7
2,8
3,1
3,5
3,4
3,8
4,2
0,155 0,215 0,31

0,18 0,24 0,345
0,195 0,26 0,38
630
710
800
710
800
900
0,435 0,575 0,565 0,705 0,695 0,835

0,485 0,645 0,63 0,79 0,775 0,935
0,54 0,71 0,7
0,87 0,86 1,03
0,2
0,22
0,24
0,26
0,28
0,31
3,1
3,4
3,7
4,1
4,4
4,8
3,6
3,9
4,3
4,7
5,3
5,5
0,235 0,305 0,435

0,26 0,35 0,495
0,3
0,39 0,55
900
1000
1120
1250
1000
1120
1250
1400
0,6
0,665
0,73
0,81
0,26
0,28
0,31
0,34
0,34
0,37
0,41
0,45
4,1
4,4
4,8
5,3
5,3
5,8
6,4
7
4,8
5,2
5,7
6,3
6,2
7
7,6
8,3
0,34
0,385
0,42
0,47
1)
0,79
0,875
0,97
1,07
0,78
0,865
0,96
1,07
max
0,37
0,42
0,47
0,97
1,075
1,2
1,33
C4
min
Axial displacement
on 1:12 taper 1)
max
0,355 0,435
0,405 0,495
0,455 0,555
0,96
1,065
1,2
1,33
1,15
1,275
1,44
1,59
min
mm
max
0,025 0,035
0,025 0,04
0,03 0,045
0,44
0,5
0,55
0,62
0,11
0,125
0,14
0,62
0,7
0,79
0,85
Valid only for solid steel shafts and hollow shafts whose bore diameter does not exceed half the shaft diameter.
Note: Bearings whose radial clearance is in the upper half of the tolerance range are mounted with the greater value of radial
clearance reduction/axial drive-up distance. Bearings whose radial clearance is in the lower half of the tolerance range are
mounted with the smaller value of radial clearance reduction/axial drive-up distance.
109 | FAG
Tables
7.17 Radial Clearance Reduction of FAG Spherical Roller Bearings

with Tapered Bore
Nominal
bore
diameter
d
over to
mm
Radial clearance
prior to mounting
Clearance group
CN (normal) C3
min max min
mm
Reduction
in radial
clearance 1)
24
30
40
50
30
40
50
65
0,03
0,035
0,045
0,055
65
80
100
80
100
120
0,07 0,095 0,095 0,12

0,08 0,11 0,11 0,14
0,1 0,135 0,135 0,17
0,12 0,15
0,14 0,18
0,17 0,22
120
140
160
140
160
180
0,12 0,16
0,13 0,18
0,14 0,2
0,16 0,2
0,18 0,23
0,2 0,26
180
200
225
200
225
250
0,16 0,22
0,18 0,25
0,2 0,27
250
280
315
280
315
355
355
400
450
Axial displacement
on 1:12 taper 1)
Axial displacement
on 1:30 taper 2)
Smallest radial
clearance
after mounting
CN
C3 C4
min
min min
mm
max
C4
min
max
min
mm
max
Shaft
Sleeve
min max min max
mm
Shaft
min min
mm
Sleeve
min max
0,055
0,065
0,08
0,095
0,055
0,065
0,08
0,095
0,075
0,085
0,1
0,12
0,015
0,02
0,025
0,03
0,02
0,025
0,03
0,04
0,3
0,35
0,4
0,45
0,35
0,4
0,45
0,6
0,015
0,015
0,02
0,025
0,04 0,05
0,045 0,06
0,05 0,07
0,6
0,7
0,7
0,75 0,7 0,85

0,9 0,75 1
1,1 0,8 1,2
1,7
1,9
2,2
2,7
1,8
2
2,4
2,8
0,025 0,04 0,07

0,035 0,05 0,08
0,05 0,065 0,1
0,2 0,26
0,23 0,3
0,26 0,34
0,065 0,09
0,075 0,1
0,08 0,11
1,1
1,2
1,3
1,4
1,6
1,7
1,2
1,3
1,4
1,5
1,7
1,9
2,7
3
3,2
3,5
4
4,2
2,8
3,1
3,3
3,6
4,2
4,6
0,055 0,08
0,055 0,09
0,06 0,1
0,11
0,13
0,15
0,22 0,29
0,25 0,32
0,27 0,35
0,29 0,37
0,32 0,41
0,35 0,45
0,09
0,1
0,11
0,13
0,14
0,15
1,4
1,6
1,7
2
2,2
2,4
1,5
1,7
1,8
2,2
2,4
2,6
3,5
4
4,2
4,5
5,5
6
3,6
4,2
4,6
5
5,7
6,2
0,07
0,08
0,09
0,1
0,12
0,13
0,16
0,18
0,2
0,22 0,3
0,24 0,33
0,27 0,36
0,3 0,39
0,33 0,43
0,36 0,47
0,39 0,49
0,43 0,54
0,47 0,59
0,12
0,13
0,15
0,17
0,19
0,21
1,9
2
2,4
2,6
3
3,4
2
2,2
2,6
2,9
3,2
3,6
4,7
5
6
6,7
7,5
8,2
4,8
5,2
6,2
6,9
7,7
8,4
0,1
0,11
0,12
0,14
0,15
0,17
0,22
0,24
0,26
400
450
500
0,3 0,4
0,33 0,44
0,37 0,49
0,4 0,52
0,44 0,57
0,49 0,63
0,52 0,65
0,57 0,72
0,63 0,79
0,17
0,2
0,21
0,23
0,26
0,28
2,6
3,1
3,3
3,6
4,1
4,4
2,9
3,4
3,6
3,9
4,4
4,8
6,5
7,7
8,2
9
10
11
5,8
8
8,4
9,2
10,4
11,2
0,13
0,13
0,16
0,19
0,2
0,23
0,29
0,31
0,35
500
560
630
560
630
710
0,41 0,54 0,54 0,68 0,68 0,87

0,46 0,6
0,6 0,76 0,76 0,98
0,51 0,67 0,67 0,85 0,85 1,09
0,24
0,26
0,3
0,32
0,35
0,4
3,7
4
4,6
5
5,4
6,2
4,1
4,4
5,1
5,4
5,9
6,8
9,2 12,5 9,6 12,8

10
13,5 10,4 14
11,5 15,5 12
16
0,17
0,2
0,21
0,25
0,29
0,31
0,36
0,41
0,45
710
800
900
800 0,57 0,75 0,75 0,96 0,96 1,22

900 0,64 0,84 0,84 1,07 1,07 1,37
1000 0,71 0,93 0,93 1,19 1,19 1,52
0,34
0,37
0,41
0,45
0,5
0,55
5,3
5,7
6,3
7
7,8
8,5
5,8
6,3
7
7,6
8,5
9,4
13,3 17,5 13,6 18

14,3 19,5 14,8 20
15,8 21
16,4 22
0,23
0,27
0,3
0,35
0,39
0,43
0,51
0,57
0,64
1000 1120 0,78 1,02 1,02 1,3

1,3 1,65
1120 1250 0,86 1,12 1,12 1,42 1,42 1,8
1250 1400 0,94 1,22 1,22 1,55 1,55 1,96
0,45
0,49
0,55
0,6
0,65
0,72
6,8
7,4
8,3
9
7,6
9,8 8,3
10,8 9,3
10,2
11
12,1
17
23
18,5 25
21
27
0,32
0,34
0,36
0,48
0,54
0,59
0,7
0,77
0,84
1)
0,04
0,05
0,06
0,075
0,04
0,05
0,06
0,075
0,3
0,35
0,45
0,5
0,4
0,45
0,5
0,7
18
24
19,6 26
22,2 28,3
0,02
0,025
0,03
0,035
0,035
0,04
0,05
0,055
Valid only for solid steel shafts and hollow shafts whose bore diameter does not exceed half the shaft diameter.
Note: Bearings whose radial clearance is in the upper half of the tolerance range are mounted with the greater value of radial clearance
reduction/axial drive-up distance. Bearings whose radial clearance is in the lower half of the tolerance range are mounted with the smaller value of radial clearance reduction/axial drive-up distance.
FAG | 110
Tables
7.23 FAG Rolling Bearing Greases Arcanol Chemico-physical data

and directions for use
Grease
Colour
Thickener
RAL
Base oil
viscosity
at 40C
mm2/s
Consistency Temperature
range
NLGI Class
Main
characteristics
Typical applications
Arcanol L78V
1018
zinc yellow
Lithium soap
ISO VG
100
30 ... +130
Standard grease
for small bearings
(D 62 mm)
Small electric motors,

agricultural machines and
construction machinery,
household appliances
Arcanol L71V
4008
signal violet
Lithium soap
ISO VG
100
30 ...+140
Standard grease
for larger bearings
(D > 62 mm)
Large electric motors,

wheel bearings for
motor vehicles, ventilators
Arcanol L135V
2000
yellow-orange
Lithium soap
with EP
additives
85
40 ... +150
Special grease for high

speeds, high loads,
high temperatures
Rolling mills, construction

machines, motor vehicles,
rail vehicles, spinning and
grinding spindles
Arcanol L186V
7005
mousegrey
Lithium soap
with EP
additives
ISO VG
460
20 ...+140
Special grease for

extremely high loads,
medium speeds,
medium temperatures
Mining machines, construction

machines, machines with
oscillating parts
Arcanol L223V
5005
signal blue
Lithium soap
with EP
additives
ISO VG
1000
10 ... +140
Special grease for

extremely high loads
low speeds
Heavily stressed mining machinery, particularly for impact

loads and large bearings
Arcanol L74V
6018
yellowgreen
Special soap
ISO VG
22
40 ... +120

speeds, low temperatures
Machine tools, spindle bearings,

instrument bearings
Arcanol L12V
2002
vermilion
Polyurea
115
30 ... +160
Special grease
for high temperatures
Couplings, electric machines

(motors, generators)
Arcanol L79V
1024
yellow ochre
Synthetic
390
30 ... +270
Special grease for ex

tremely high temperatures
(safety information, see page 60)
chemically aggressive
environment
Track rollers in bakery machines,

piston pins in compressors,
kiln trucks, chemical plants
113 | FAG
Fundamental Course
Fundamental Course for Vocational Training
Plenty of literature is available on the correct

mounting of rolling bearings. In most cases, however, the apprentices lack means and components for practical training. Therefore, the instructors of the FAG apprentice shops have prepared a fundamental course.
The target of this fundamental course is to impart
the knowledge of the selection of the suitable bearing, appropriate mounting and dismounting, and
maintenance. Therefore, the course has two parts.
The theoretical part deals with rolling bearing
fundamentals, the practical part with the basic
skill required for mounting and dismounting.
For the theoretical part, great store has been set
by reasonably combining technical drawing,
arithmetic, and instruction in mechanical engineering. For the practical part, simplified
models of the mating parts of rolling bearings
(shafts and housings) are available by means of
which the mounting and dismounting of the current bearing types can be practised with mechanical and hydraulic equipment.
The subjects taught are based on instruction records and do not exceed the degree of difficulty required today in vocational training.
Based on this fundamental course, other units
such as transmissions, pumps, spindles, motor
car wheels etc. can be prepared for practical
training.
FAG | 114
Theoretical Part
Instructions in mechanical engineering
Technical arithmetic
Technical drawing
Practical Part
Mounting of bearings with cylindrical bore
Mounting of bearings with tapered bore
Hydraulic technique
Mounting of heated bearings
Practical training with shafts and housings
Technical Data
Mounting cabinet:
Dimensions 1135x710x380 mm
Weight (with contents) 94 kg
Angle plate: Dimensions 500x300x300 mm
Weight 40 kg
suitable for 10 mounting exercises:
5 with shafts, 2 with housings,
3 with shafts and housings
Smallest shaft diameter 15 mm
Largest shaft diameter 55 mm
Selection of FAG Publications
The following publications are selected from the numerous FAG

publications available. Further information on request.
Catalogue WL 41520 EA
FAG Rolling Bearings
Publ. No. MT 55135 EA
Measuring Instruments for Mounting

and Inspection of Rolling Bearings
Publ. No. WL 80102 EA
How to Mount and Dismount Rolling

Bearings Hydraulically
FAG Hydraulic Nuts
FAG Induction Heating Equipment
FAG Induction Heating Device

A45EA110
FAG Induction Heating Device

A45EA020DV220
Methods and Equipment for the

Mounting and Maintenance of Rolling
Bearings
115 | FAG
Tables
7.6 STANDARD TOLERANCES OF METRIC FAG RADIAL BEARINGS IN 0.0001 INCH
(EXCEPT METRIC TAPERED ROLLER BEARINGS)
INNER RING
NOMINAL
d
MM
TOLERANCES
Bore cylindrical
dmp
Vdp
Vdmp
diameter series
789 01 234
over to
low
high
2.5
10
18
30
50
80
120
180
230
315
400
500
630
800
1000
3
3
4
5
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20
29.5
39
49
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
10
18
30
50
80
120
180
250
315
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
4
4
5
6
7.5
10
12
15
17
20
22
25
3
3
4
5
7.5
10
12
15
17
20
22
25
2.5
2.5
3
3.5
4.5
6
7.5
9
10
12
13.5
15
2.5
2.5
3
3.5
4.5
6
7.5
9
10
12
13.5
15
Bore, taper 1:12

Bore, taper 1:30
dmp
d1mpdmp Vdp dmp
d1mpdmp Vdp Bs
low high
low high
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
+6
+7
+8
+10
+12
+14
+16
+18
+20.5
+22
+25
+27.5
+31.5
+35
+41
+6
+7
+8
+10
+12
+14
+16
+18
+20.5
+22
+25
+27.5
+31.5
+35
+41
low high
4
4
5
6
7.5
10
12
15
17
20
22
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
+6
+8
+10
+12
+14
+16
+18
+19.5
+29.5
+39
+49
low high
low
high
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
47
47
47
47
59
79
100
120
140
160
180
200
295
395
490
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
+14
+16
+19.5
+21.5
+23.5
+25.5
+29.5
+33.5
+39
+39
+45
7.5
10
12
15
17
20
22
25
OUTER RING
NOMINAL
D
MM
TOLERANCES
Dmp
over
to
low
high
6
18
30
50
80
120
150
180
250
315
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
18
30
50
80
120
150
180
250
315
400
500
630
800
1000
1250
1600
3
3.5
4
5
6
7
10
12
14
16
18
20
29.5
39
49
63
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
VDp
diameter series
789
01
234
sealed
bearings
234
4
5
5.5
6
7.5
9
12
15
17
20
22
25
37
49
2.5
3
3
4
4
5.5
7.5
9
10
12
13.5
15
21.5
29.5
4
5
6
8
10
12
15
3
3.5
4
5
7.5
9
12
15
17
20
22
25
37
49
VDmp
Kea
2.5
3
3
4
4
5.5
7.5
9
10
12
13.5
15
21.5
29.5
6
6
8
10
14
16
18
20
24
28
31
39
47
55
63
75
The width tolerances Cs and VCs are identical with Bs and VBs for the pertinent inner ring.
FAG | 102
VBs
Kia
6
8
8
8
10
10
12
12
14
16
20
24
28
32
39
4
4
5
6
8
10
12
16
20
24
25
28
32
35
39
Table of Contents
5.
5.1
5.2
5.3
Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Greases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Oils . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Selection of lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
65
65
66
66
6.
6.1
6.1.1
6.1.2
6.1.3
6.1.4
6.1.5
6.2
6.3
6.3.1
6.3.2
6.3.3
Rolling bearing damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Why does a bearing fail? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Faulty mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Contamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Passage of electric current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Imperfect lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to recognize bearing damage in operation? . . . . .
How to pinpoint bearing damage? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Observations prior to dismounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Observations during dismounting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bearing inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
70
71
71
73
74
75
75
77
78
78
79
81
7.
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
Tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bearing designation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Designation of bearing series . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shaft tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Housing tolerances . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal tolerances of FAG radial bearings
(except tapered roller bearings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Normal tolerances of FAG tapered roller bearings. . . . .
Normal tolerances of FAG thrust bearings . . . . . . . . . . .
Limit dimensions of chamfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial clearance of FAG deep groove ball bearings . . .
Radial clearance of FAG self-aligning ball bearings . . .
Radial clearance of FAG cylindrical roller bearings . . . . .
Radial clearance of FAG spherical roller bearings . . . . .
Radial clearance of FAG barrel roller bearings. . . . . . . .
Axial clearance of FAG double row angular contact
ball bearings (series 32 and 33). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Axial clearance of FAG four-point bearings . . . . . . . . . .
Radial clearance reduction of FAG cylindrical roller
bearings with tapered bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Radial clearance reduction of FAG spherical roller
bearings with tapered bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FAG rolling bearing greases Arcanol. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
83
83
84
86
90
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.11
7.12
7.13
7.14
7.15
7.16
7.17
7.18
94
96
97
98
100
101
102
104
106
107
108
109
110
111
Fundamental course for vocational training. . . . . . . . . . 112

Selection of FAG publications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5 | FAG
Tables
7.18 FAG Rolling Bearing Greases Arcanol Chemico-physical data

and directions for use
Grease
Colour
Thickener
RAL
Base oil
viscosity
at 40C
mm2/s
Consistency Temperature
range
NLGI Class
Main
characteristics
Typical applications
Arcanol L78V
1018
zinc yellow
Lithium soap
ISO VG
100
30 ... +130
Standard grease
for small bearings
(D 62 mm)
Small electric motors,

agricultural machines and
construction machinery,
household appliances
Arcanol L71V
4008
signal violet
Lithium soap
ISO VG
100
30 ...+140
Standard grease
for larger bearings
(D > 62 mm)
Large electric motors,

wheel bearings for
motor vehicles, ventilators
Arcanol L135V
2000
yellow-orange
Lithium soap
with EP
additives
85
40 ... +150

speeds, high loads,
high temperatures
Rolling mills, construction

machines, motor vehicles,
rail vehicles, spinning and
grinding spindles
Arcanol L186V
7005
mousegrey
Lithium soap
with EP
additives
ISO VG
460
20 ...+140
Special grease for

extremely high loads,
medium speeds,
medium temperatures
Mining machines, construction

machines, machines with
oscillating parts
Arcanol L223V
5005
signal blue
Lithium soap
with EP
additives
ISO VG
1000
10 ... +140
Special grease for

extremely high loads
low speeds
Heavily stressed mining machinery, particularly for impact

loads and large bearings
Arcanol L74V
6018
yellowgreen
Special soap
ISO VG
22
40 ... +120

speeds, low temperatures
Machine tools, spindle bearings,

instrument bearings
Arcanol L12V
2002
vermilion
Polyurea
115
30 ... +160
Special grease
for high temperatures
Couplings, electric machines

(motors, generators)
Arcanol L79V
1024
yellow ochre
Synthetic
390
30 ... +270
Special grease for ex

tremely high temperatures
(safety information, see page 60)
chemically aggressive
environment
Track rollers in bakery machines,

piston pins in compressors,
kiln trucks, chemical plants
111 | FAG
Selection of FAG Publications
The following publications are selected from the numerous FAG

publications available. Further information on request.
Catalogue WL 41520
FAG Rolling Bearings
Publ. No. WL 00106
W.L.S. Rolling Bearing Learning System
Publ. No. WL 40135
W.A.S. Rolling Bearing Selection and Calculation with the PC
Publ. No. WL 80102
How to Mount and Dismount Rolling Bearings Hydraulically
Publ. No. WL 80103
FAG Hydraulic Nuts
Publ. No. WL 80107
FAG Induction Heating Equipment
Publ. No. WL 80111
Rolling Bearings and Rolling Bearing Mounting

A fundamental course for vocational training
Publ. No. WL 80123
All about the Rolling Bearing FAG Training Courses on Rolling

Bearings Theory and Practice
Publ. No. WL 80126
FAG Induction Heating Device A45EA110V380
Publ. No. WL 80132
FAG Induction Heating Device A45EA020DV220
Publ. No. WL 80134
FAG Video: Mounting and Dismounting of Rolling Bearings
Publ. No. WL 80135
FAG Video: Hydraulic Methods for the Mounting and Dismounting

of Rolling Bearings
Publ. No. WL 80136
Rolling Bearing Diagnosis in Machines and Plants

FAG Rolling Bearing Analyser
Publ. No. WL 80137
Rolling Bearing Diagnosis with the FAG Detector
Publ. No. WL 80200
Methods and Equipment for the Mounting and Maintenance of

Rolling Bearings
Publ. No. WL 81115
Rolling Bearing Lubrication
Publ. No. WL 82102
TI No. WL 00-11
FAG Videos on Rolling Bearings
TI No. WL 80-3
Mechanical Extracting Devices
TI No. WL 80-9
Aluminium Heating Ring for Cylindrical Roller Bearing Inner Rings
TI No. WL 80-14
Mounting and Dismounting of Spherical Roller Bearings with

Tapered Bore
TI No. WL 80-38
Mounting of Self-aligning Ball Bearings on Adapter Sleeves
113 | FAG
UNICASE Shaft Mount Gearboxes
BIM 1020
Installation and Maintenance Instructions
USA
Retain These Safety Instructions For Future Use
CDN
INSPECTION OF UNIT
Thoroughly inspect the equipment for any shipping and handling damage before accepting shipment from the freight company. If any of the
goods called for in the bill of lading or express receipt are damaged or the quantity is short, do not accept until the freight or express agent
makes an appropriate notation on your freight bill or express receipt. If any concealed loss or damage is discovered later, notify your freight
carrier or express agent at once and request him to make an inspection. We will be very happy to assist you in collecting claims for loss or
damage during shipment; however, this willingness on our part does not remove the transportation companys responsibility in reimbursing
you for collection of claims or replacement of material. Claims for loss or damage in shipment must not be deducted from the NORD Gear
invoice, nor should payment of the NORD Gear invoice be withheld awaiting adjustment of such claims, as the carrier guarantees safe
delivery.
If considerable damage has been incurred and the situation is urgent, contact the nearest NORD Gear Sales Office for assistance. Please
keep a written record of all communications.
RECORD NAMEPLATE DATA

Locate the gear reducer nameplate and record all nameplate data for future reference.
SK ________________________________________________________ S/N _________________________________
RATIO ______________ MAX TORQUE ____________________ RPM ______________ MTG. POS ______________
STORAGE
PROPER STORAGE UNTIL INSTALLED
Keep unit in a dry, temperature controlled area. If stored other
than said, long term storage methods must be applied to the unit
including complete fill with lubricant. Protect machined surfaces
and rotate shafts periodically. Prior to putting unit into service,
drain lubricant and refill to proper level as determined by the
mounting position.
BIM 1020/2005/03
PROPER HANDLING OF THE UNIT

Exercise care to prevent damage to the unit when moving. Lift
onIy at designed Iifting points. Do not attach other machinery and
lift by the unit lifting points. The lifting points are to be used to lift
the unit only. Insure that adequate safety measures are taken to
protect personneI during transportation. Protect the mounting
surface from damage.
Page 1 of 12
www.nord.com
INSTALLATION OF UNIT
To ensure Iong service and dependabIe performance, an encIosed gear drive must be rigidIy supported and the shafts accurateIy aIigned.
The foIIowing describes the minimum precautions required to accompIish this end.
FOUNDATION
The responsibiIity for the design and construction of the
foundation Iies with the user. The foundation must be adequate
to withstand normaI operating Ioads and possibIe overIoads whiIe
maintaining aIignment to attached system components under
such Ioads.
MOUNTING POSITION
UnIess a unit is specificaIIy ordered for incIined mounting, the
foundation must be IeveI and fIat. The Iubrication system may
not operate properIy if the unit is not mounted in the position for
which it is designed. It may be desirabIe to eIevate the
foundation to faciIitate oiI drainage.
CONCRETE FOUNDATION
If a concrete foundation is used, steeI mounting pads and boIts of
sufficient size to distribute the stress into the concrete shouId be
grouted into the foundation.
STEEL FOUNDATION
If a structuraI steeI foundation is used (i.e. wide fIange beams or
channeIs), a base pIate or soIe pIate of suitabIe thickness shouId
be used and shouId extend under the entire unit.
FOOT MOUNTED UNITS
Use shims under the feet of the unit to aIign the output shaft to
the driven equipment. Make sure that aII feet are supported so
that the housing wiII not distort when it is boIted down. Improper
shimming wiII reduce the Iife of the unit and may cause faiIure.
DoweI pins may be instaIIed to prevent misaIignment and ensure
proper reaIignment if removed for service.
SHAFT MOUNTED UNITS
Shaft mounted drives should be mounted as close to the driven
equipment bearing support as possible to minimize bearing loads
due to overhung load. Design of the joint connection between the
torque reaction arm and the foundation is the users responsibility.
HoIIow Shaft Diameter toIerance
Metric (mm)
18 = +0.018/-0.000
> 18 30 = +0.021/-0.000
> 30 50 = +0.025/-0.000
> 50 80 = +0.030/-0.000
> 80 120 = +0.035/-0.000
> 120 180 = +0.040/-0.000
Inch
4.375 = +0.0010 / -0.0000
> 4.375 = +0.0015 / -0.0000
Customer shaft diameter toIerances with keyed hoIIow shafts
Metric (mm)
18 = +0.000/-0.011
> 18 30 = +0.000/-0.013
> 30 50 = +0.000/-0.016
> 50 80 = +0.000/-0.019
> 80 120 = +0.000/-0.022
> 120 180 = +0.000/-0.025
Inch
1.500 = +0.000/-0.002
> 1.500 2.500 = +0.000/-0.003
> 2.500 7.000 = +0.000/-0.004
Shaft finish to be 125 micro inches or smoother.
Customer shaft diameter toIerance with Shrink Disc fit h6
Metric (mm)
18 = +0.000/-0.011
> 18 30 = +0.000/-0.013
> 30 50 = +0.000/-0.016
BIM 1020/2005/03
> 50 80 = +0.000/-0.019
> 80 120 = +0.000/-0.022
> 120 180 = +0.000/-0.025
Inch
0.750 = +0.0000/-0.0004
> 0.750 1.125 = +0.0000/-0.0005
> 1.125 2.000 = +0.0000/-0.0006
> 2.000 3.000 = +0.0000/-0.0007
> 3.000 4.750 = +0.0000/-0.0008
> 4.750 7.000 = +0.0000/-0.0010
Shaft finish to be 125 micro inches or smoother.
Customer shaft diameter toIerance with Shrink Disc fit f6
(Iooser fit)
Metric (mm)
18 = -0.016/-0.024
> 18 30 = -0.020/-0.029
> 30 50 = -0.025/-0.036
> 50 80 = -0.030/-0.043
> 80 120 = -0.036/-0.051
> 120 180 = -0.043/-0.061
Inch
0.750 = -0.0006/-0.0011
> 0.750 1.125 = -0.0008/-0.0013
> 1.125 2.000 = -0.0010/-0.0016
> 2.000 3.000 = -0.0012/-0.0019
> 3.000 4.750 = -0.0014/-0.0023
> 4.750 7.000 = -0.0017/-0.0027
Shaft finish to be 125 micro inches or smoother
FLANGE MOUNTED UNITS
If a structuraI steeI foundation is used (i.e. wide fIange beams or
channeIs), a base pIate or soIe pIate of suitabIe thickness shouId
be used and shouId extend under the entire unit. If a buIk head
pIate is used it shouId be of proper strength to minimize buckIing
distortions.
FIange PiIot AK or AK1 toIerance
Metric (mm)
> 50 80 = +0.012/-0.007
> 80 120 = +0.013/-0.009
> 120 180 = +0.014/-0.011
> 180 230 = +0.016/-0.013
> 230 315 = +0.000-0.032
> 315 400 = +0.000/-0.036
> 400 500 = +0.000/-0.040
Inch
> 1.969 3.150 = +0.005/-0.0003
> 3.150 4.724 = +0.005/-0.0004
> 4.724 7.087 = +0.006/-0.0004
> 7.087 9.055 = +0.006/-0.0005
> 9.055 12.402 = +0.000/-0.0013
> 12.402 15.748 = +0.000/-0.0014
> 15.748 19.685 = +0.000/-0.0016
BOLT STRENGTH
BoIt size, strength and quantity shouId be verified to insure proper
torque reaction capacity whatever the mounting arrangement.
LUBRICATE SHAFTS
Both the hollow shaft and the driven shaft should be liberally
lubricated before assembly. The unit must slide freely onto the
driven shaft. Do not hammer or force the unit into place. For
shrink disc, follow instructions below.
Page 2 of 12
www.nord.com
AXIAL RETENTION
Each drive shaft must be retained in place relative to the gear
reducer. Or each gear reducer must be retained in place relative
to the drive shaft. Either way NORD recommends the use of
shaft shoulders, locking collars or FIXING ELEMENTS to axially
retain the shaft or gear reducer in position.
SET SCREWS
If set screws are used for axial retention, they should be tightened
evenly. Flats may be filed on the driven shaft and a threadlocking adhesive used for more position retention.
SNAP RING RETENTION
Placing external snap rings on drive shafts must be performed
with caution. The groove, which the snap ring fits into, may
weaken the drive shaft causing premature failure. NORD does
not recommend this type of shaft retention.
THRUST PLATE
In applications, which are subject to high vibratory loads, a thrust
plate will provide greater resistance to axial movement. Follow
the manufacturers recommendations for assembly.
SHRINK DISC
If a shrink disc is used to secure a reducer hollow shaft to the
driven shaft, follow this assembly procedure. Start with the shrink
disc mounted onto the extension of the hollow shaft disc locking
bolts loosened.
1. Clean reducer bore and mating solid shaft to be free of any
lubricants or dirt.
2. Slide reducer onto the solid shaft until it is about half way
through.
3. Lubricate the remaining portion of the solid shaft with a #2
grease or similar lubricant. This part will be located under
the bronze bushing. Do not install grease under the
shrink disc gripping area. Finish installing the solid shaft
into the reducer hollow bore.
4. Finger tighten all shrink disc bolts. Now, moving a circular
pattern, tighten each shrink disc locking bolt 1/4 to 1/2 turn.
Do not use criss cross pattern. Continue tightening in the
same circular direction with 1/4 or 1/2 turn increments until
all bolts reach the specified bolt tightening torque. Bolt
tightening torque is shown on the shrink disc label for the
particular unit.
5. Run unit for 24 hours, then retighten shrink disc locking bolts
to the proper bolt torque as indicated above.
Output and Input shaft Diameter toIerance

Metric (mm)
18 = +0.012/+0.001
> 18 30 = +0.015/+0.002
> 30 50 = +0.018/+0.002
> 50 80 = +0.030/+0.011
> 80 120 = +0.035/+0.013
> 120 180 = +0.040/+0.015
Inch
1.750 = +0.0000/-0.0005
> 1.750 = +0.0000/-0.0010
Output and Input shaft DriII and tap shaft end
Metric (mm)
16 = M5
> 16 21 = M6
> 21 24 = M8
> 24 30 = M10
> 30 38 = M12
> 38 50 = M16
> 50 85 = M20
> 85 130 = M24
Inch
0.438 = #10-24 x 0.4 deep
> 0.438 0.813 = 1/4-20 x 0.6 deep
> 0.813 0.938 = 5/16-18 x 0.7 deep
> 0.938 1.125 = 3/8-16 x 0.9 deep
> 1.125 1.375 = 1/2-13 x 1.1 deep
> 1.375 1.875 = 5/8-11 x 1.4 deep
> 1.875 3.250 = 3/4-10 x 1.7 deep
> 3.250
= 1-8 x 2.2 deep
Outboard pinion and sprocket fits shouId be as recommended by
the pin sprockets with interference fits shouId be heated
according to the manufacturers recommendations, generaIIy
250F to 300F, (120C to 150 C) before assembIing to the shaft.
LOCATION
CoupIing hubs shouId be mounted fIush with the shaft ends,
unIess specificaIIy ordered for overhung mounting. Pinions,
TORQUE REACTION ARM

On the shaft mount Clincher, torque is reacted through the
integral torque tab, which is part of the casting. Commonly,
NORDs optional RUBBER BUFFER bushings are installed on
each side of the integral torque tab to dampen torque shocks and
allow for mis-alignment received from the machinery during
operation.
Torque arm connection fabrications should always be mounted
perpendicular to a line through the output shaft center and the
point at attachment of the torque arm to the unit housing. In this
position the minimum load on the attachment structure arm will be
experienced. The attachment structure must be rigid and may not
deflect under any load. Doing so will place extra loads on the
output bearings of the reducer.
PRIME MOVER MOUNTING
AIign the prime mover to the reducer-input shaft using shims
under the feet. Make sure that the feet are supported. DoweI the
prime mover to its foundation.
SHAFT CONNECTIONS
When connecting shafts to either the input or output of the
reducer, consider the foIIowing instructions.
sprockets and sheaves shouId be mounted as cIose as possibIe

to the unit housing to minimize bearing Ioads and shaft
defIections.
FITS
CIearance or interference fits for coupIing hubs shouId be in
accordance with ANSI/AGMA 9002-A86 or as follows.
BIM 1020/2005/03
Page 3 of 12
www.nord.com
COUPLING ALIGNMENT
Shaft coupIings shouId be instaIIed according to the coupIing
manufacturers recommendations for gap, anguIar and paraIIeI
aIignment. In many instaIIations, it is necessary to aIIow for
thermaI and mechanicaI shaft movement when determining shaft
aIignment. The coupIing manufacturers recommendations
shouId be foIIowed.
CHANGES IN PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS
AXIAL DISPLACEMENT
The gap between shaft ends shouId be the same as the specified
coupIing gap unIess overhung mounting of the coupIing hub is
specified. The coupIing gap and shaft gap must be sufficient to
accommodate any anticipated thermaI or mechanicaI axiaI
movement.
LOCK OUT POWER before any maintenance is performed.

Make absolutely sure that no voltage is applied while work is
being done on the gearbox.
ANGULAR ALIGNMENT
Insert a spacer or shim stock equaI to the required coupIing gap
between the coupIing hub faces and measure the cIearance using
feeIer gauges. Repeat this at the same depth at 90-degree
intervaIs to determine the amount of anguIar misaIignment.
PARALLEL ALIGNMENT
Mount a diaI indicator to one coupIing hub, and rotate this hub,
sweeping the outside diameter of the other hub. The paraIIeI
misaIignment is equaI to one-haIf of the totaI indicator reading.
Another method is to rest a straight edge squareIy on the outside
diameter of the hubs at 90-degree intervaIs and measure any
gaps with feeIer gauges. The maximum gap measurement is the
paraIIeI misaIignment.
CHECKING ALIGNMENT
After both anguIar and paraIIeI aIignments are within specified
Iimits, tighten aII foundation boIts secureIy and repeat the above
procedure to check aIignment. If any of the specified Iimits for
aIignment are exceeded, reaIign the coupIing.
SPROCKET OR SHEAVE ALIGNMENT
AIign the sheaves or sprockets square and paraIIeI by pIacing a
straight edge across their faces. AIignment of bushed sheaves
and sprockets shouId be checked after bushings have been
tightened. Check horizontaI shaft aIignment by pIacing a IeveI
verticaIIy against the face of the sheave or sprocket. Adjust beIt
or chain tension per the manufacturers specified procedure.
Owner has the responsibiIity to consult with NORD GEAR if such

items such as applied Ioads, operating speeds or other operating
conditions have changed.
WARNING:
START-UP
1.
2.
Ensure that switches, aIarms, heaters, coolers and other

safety and protection devices are instaIIed and operational
for their intended purpose.
Verify that the installed mounting position is the same as the
nametag mounting position. If not, adjust the oil level
accordingly and relocate the vent plug, fill plug and drain
plug according to the mounting position. See following.
AUTOVENT PLUG
The Autovent plug is brass in color and will be located at the
highest point on the gearbox. It operates like a check-valve to
allow the reducer to relieve internal pressure while preventing
lubricant contamination during cooling. A spring presses a ball or
plunger against a machined orifice until pressure exceeds 2 psi.
Above 2 psi the air is allowed to escape depressurizing the
gearcase. When internal pressure drops below 2 psi, the
autovent re-seals closing the unit to the outside environment.
After shutdown, the reducer cools along with the air inside the
reducer. The unit will temporarily maintain a slight vacuum until
normalization occurs. NORD Gear supplies an Autovent as a
standard feature.
OUTBOARD PINION ALIGNMENT

AIign the pinion by adjusting the gear tooth cIearance according
to the manufacturers recommendations and checking for
acceptabIe outboard pinion tooth contact. The foundation boIts
may have to be Ioosened and the unit moved sIightIy to obtain
this contact. When the unit is moved to correct tooth contact, the
prime mover shouId be reaIigned.
RECHECK ALIGNMENT
After a period of operation, recheck aIignment and adjust as
required.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The Autovent releases built-up air pressure from

inside the gearbox (Max. pressure 2 psi).
Properly install unit on a rigid foundation
adequateIy supported
secureIy boIted into pIace
IeveIed so as not to distort the gear case

Properly install couplings suitabIe for the application and
connected equipment.
Ensure accurate aIignment with other equipment.
Furnish and install adequate machinery guards as needed to
protect operating personneI and as required by the
appIicabIe standards of the OccupationaI Safety and HeaIth
Administration (OSHA), and by other appIicabIe safety
reguIations;
Ensure that driving equipment is running in the correct
direction before coupling to reducers with backstops
(designed to operate onIy in a specific direction) or
machinery designed to operate only in one direction.
BIM 1020/2005/03
Page 4 of 12
www.nord.com
FILL LEVEL & DRAIN PLUGS

The drain plugs are metric socket head cap screws. They will be
located at the lowest part of the gearbox for ease of draining. The
fill level plug is a hex head cap screw. It will be located between
the Autovent and drain plug. Both types of plugs will have gaskets
included to prevent oil from leaking.
LUBRICANT
AII NORD reducers are shipped from the factory properIy fiIIed
with Iubricant and all plugs are installed according to the mounting
position given on the reducer nametag. Acceptable oil fill level is
within inch of the bottom of the fill plug threads.
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE CHECKLIST
1. Operate the equipment as it was intended to be operated
2. Do not overIoad.
3. Run at correct speed.
4. Maintain Iubricant in good condition and at proper IeveI.
5. Dispose of used Iubricant in accordance with appIicabIe
Iaws and reguIations.
6. AppIy proper maintenance to attached equipment at
prescribed intervaIs recommended by the manufacturer.
7. Perform periodic maintenance of the gear drive as
recommended by NORD.
Two types of plugs for maintenance
MOUNTING POSITIONS
These charts detail the mounting positions for horizontal and vertical mounting. The Autovent, oil fill plug and drain plug are indicated on each
mounting position picture. The factory set mounting position and plug locations match that shown on the gearbox nametag. For mounting
orientations other than shown consult NORD Gear.
Horizontal position
SK 6282 - SK 11282
SK 6282 - SK 11282
SK 6382 - SK 12382
SK 6382 - SK 12382
SK 1282 - SK 5282
SK 6382 - SK 12382
SK 1282 - SK 5282
SK 1282 - SK 5282
SK 2382 - SK 5382
H2
H1
SK 2382 - SK 5382
H3
H4
Vertical position
H5*
Symbols:
Vent plug
H6
Oil level
Drain plug
* Mounting position H5 with lubricant

expansion unit recommended
SK0182NB & SK1382NB have no vent or drain plugs. They are filled with synthetic oil so the units are
Lubed for Life.
BIM 1020/2005/03
Page 5 of 12
www.nord.com
MAINTENANCE
Mineral lubricant should be changed every 10,000 service hours or after two years. For synthetic oils, the lube should be changed every
20,000 service hours or after four years. In case of extreme operating (e.g. high humidity, aggressive environment or large temperature
variations), shorter intervals between changes are recommended.
OIL SPECIFICATIONS
NORD supplies aII reducers fiIIed with oiI from the factory. Consult the sticker adjacent to the fill plug to determine the type of lubricant
installed at the factory. Standard lubricant is ISO VG220 mineral-based oil. However, some units have special lubricants designed to operate
in certain environments or to extend the service life of the lubricant. If in doubt about which lubricant is needed, contact NORD Gear.
STANDARD OIL ISO VG220
Ambient Temperature
20 to 104F (-5 to 40C)
FormuIation
MineraI
TYPICAL OILS
Viscosity
ISO NLGI
Formulation
Service
Temperature
Range
Conventional 20C to +50C

Mineral
68F to +122F
VG 460
Synthetic
-30C to +80C
PAO
-22F to +176F
Conventional
0C to +30C
Mineral
32F to +86F
VG 320
Synthetic
-35C to +80C
PAO
-31F to +176F
Conventional
-5C to +40C
Mineral
+20F to +104F
VG 220
Synthetic
-34C to +80C
PAO
-30F to +176F
Conventional -15C to +25C
VG 150
Mineral
5F to +77F
&
Synthetic
-37C to +10C
VG 100
PAO
-35F to +50F
Conventional -15C to +25C
Mineral
5F to +77F
VG 68
Synthetic
-40C to +10C
PAO
-40F to +50F
Synthetic
-40C to +10C
VG 32
PAO
-40F to +50F
PAO = Poly Alpha Olefin
Shell
Mobilgear
634
Mobil
SHC 634
Mobilgear
632
Mobil
SHC 632
Mobilgear
630
Mobil
SHC 630
Mobilgear
629
Mobil
SHC 629
Mobilgear
626
Mobil
SHC 626
Mobil
SHC 624
Omala
460
Omala
460 HD
Omala
320
Omala
320 HD
Omala
220
Omala
220 HD
Omala
100
Omala
150 HD
Omala
68
N/A
N/A
Castrol
7EP
Isolube
EP 460
6EP
Isolube
EP 460
5EP
Isolube
EP 220
4EP
Isolube
EP 150
2EP
Klberoil
GEM 1-460
Klbersynth
EG 4-460
Klberoil
GEM 1-320
Klbersynth
EG 4-320
Klberoil
GEM 1-220
Klbersynth
EG 4-220
Klberoil
GEM 1-150
Klbersynth
EG 4-150
Klberoil
GEM 1-68
Energol
Tribol
GR-XP 460 1100/460
Tribol
N/A
1510/460
Energol
Tribol
GR-XP 320 1100/320
Tribol
N/A
1510/320
Energol
Tribol
GR-XP 220 1100/220
Tribol
N/A
1510/220
Energol
Tribol
GR-XP 100 1100/100
N/A
N/A
Energol
GR-XP 68
Tribol
1100/68
Isolube
EP 68
N/A
N/A
N/A
N/A
Klber-Summit
HySyn FG-32
N/A
N/A
SPECIAL PURPOSE LUBRICANTS

Ambient Temperature
20 to 104F (-5 to 40C)
20 to 104F (-5 to 40C)
5 to 125F (-20 to 50C)
-30 to 140F (-35 to 60C)
-30 to 140F (-35 to 60C)
FormuIation
Food Grade Oil - Synthetic
Food Grade Oil - Synthetic
FIuid Grease
FIuid Grease - Synthetic
FIuid Grease - Synthetic
Manufacturer
Chevron
OilJAX
MobiI
MobiI
SheII
Oil Brand Name

FM ISO 220
MagnapIate 85W140-FG
MobiIux EP023
MobiIith SHC 007
Albida LC
Manufacturer
SheII
LubripIate
Grease Brand Name

AerosheII 6
SFL1
STANDARD BEARING GREASE NLGI 2EP Lithium

Ambient Temperature
-20 to 140F (-30 to 60C)
FormuIation
MineraI
OPTIONAL BEARING GREASES

Ambient Temperature
-40 to 230F (-40 to 110C)
-40 to 230F (-40 to 110C)
BIM 1020/2005/03
FormuIation
Synthetic
Food Grade - Synthetic
Page 6 of 12
www.nord.com
LUBRICANT CAPACITY
Each reducer has the oil level and oil quantity adjusted according to the mounting position shown in the tables. When replacing the oil, consult
the tables below to determine the proper amount of oil to be installed according to the reducer size and mounting position. Note that this is
approximate and the final level will be adjusted when the reducer is installed. Acceptable oil fill level is within inch of the bottom of the fill
plug threads.
LUBRICATION CAPACITY - SHAFT MOUNT 'CLINCHER' GEARBOXES

MOUNTING POSITION
Horizontal
H1
H2
MOUNTING POSITION
Vertical
H3
H4
H5
SK 0182NB quarts 0.42 0.63 0.53 0.53 0.58 0.58

liters
quarts 0.74 0.85 0.95 0.95 1.16 1.06
SK 1282
quarts 0.95 0.95 1.00 1.00 1.27 1.37

liters
SK 3282
quarts 3.33 3.44 3.33 3.33 4.33 4.33
SK 4282
liters
SK 5282
liters
SK 6282
liters
SK 7282
liters
SK 8282
20
21
16
27
2.43
2.30
SK 2382
quarts
1.80
2.01 1.59 1.59
3.28
2.75
liters
1.70
1.90 1.50 1.50
3.10
2.60
SK 3382
quarts
4.33
3.49 3.49 3.49
5.92
4.33
liters
4.10
3.30 3.30 3.30
5.60
4.10
SK 4382
quarts
6.24
5.18 5.18 5.18
8.77
7.19
liters
5.90
4.90 4.90 4.90
8.30
6.80
SK 5382
quarts 13.21 7.08 8.77 8.77 14.80 12.68

liters
SK 6382
SK 7382
SK 8382
37
30
31
31
41
SK 9382
21
quarts 39.1 31.7 32.8 32.8 43.3 34.9

liters
2.22
2.10
17.0 12.0 14.0 10.0 17.5 14.0

25
SK 10382
quarts 78.2 58.1 62.4 72.9 76.1 74.0

liters
74
55
59
69
72
70
SK 10282
quarts
95
42
87
63
95
95
liters
90
40
82
60
90
90
SK 11282
quarts
174
153
148
106
206
169
liters
165
145
140
100
195
160
12.50 6.70 8.30 8.30 14.00 12.00
quarts
17.4
10.1 13.2 14.8
19.0
liters
16.5
9.6
12.5 14.0
18.0
13.0
quarts
23.3
16.9 20.1 24.3
26.4
21.1
liters
22
25
20
quarts
35.9
40.2
33.8
liters
34
quarts
77.2
liters
73
16
19
23
26.4 31.7 37.0

25
30
35
47.6 63.4 68.7

45
60
65
13.7
38
32
78.2
74.0
74
70
quarts
90
77
85
85
93
93
liters
85
73
80
80
88
88
SK 11382
quarts
169
148
143
164
222
164
liters
160
140
135
155
210
155
SK 12382
quarts
169
148
143
164
222
164
liters
160
140
135
155
210
155
33
SK 9282
H6
1.48 2.01 2.11
7.50 7.50 7.20 7.20 8.80 8.80
quarts 26.4 21.1 22.2 16.9 28.5 22.2
H5
1.40 1.90 2.00
4.70 4.75 4.70 4.70 5.40 6.10
quarts 18.0 12.7 14.8 10.6 18.5 14.8
H4
1.37
3.15 3.25 3.15 3.15 4.10 4.10
quarts 7.93 7.93 7.61 7.61 9.30 9.30
Vertical
H3
1.30
1.65 1.90 1.80 1.80 2.00 2.40
quarts 4.97 5.02 4.97 4.97 5.71 6.45
H2
liters
0.90 0.90 0.95 0.95 1.20 1.30
quarts 1.74 2.01 1.90 1.90 2.11 2.54
liters
SK 1382NB quarts
0.70 0.80 0.90 0.90 1.10 1.00
SK 2282
liters
H1
0.40 0.60 0.50 0.50 0.55 0.55
SK0282NB
liters
Horizontal
H6
Note: Filling quantities are approximate figures. Oil level must be checked according to oil level plug after final installtion.
Acceptable oil fill level is within 1/2 inch of the bottom of the fill plug threads. For mounting angles not shown, consult factory.
BIM 1020/2005/03
Page 7 of 12
www.nord.com
PARTS LIST
SK 1282 - SK 5282
201
202
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
250
254
SK 6282 - SK11282
Driven gear
Pinion shaft
Driving gear
Driving pinion
Output shaft (Hollow shaft )
Key
Shaft seal
Shaft seal
Circlip
Shim
Ball bearing
Seal
Gear case cover
Vent plug
Seal
Socket head screw
Key
Circlip
Ball bearing
Locking cap
Washer
Washer
Socket head screw
Socket head screw
Seal
Supporting disc
Gearbox cover
Circlip
Seal
Key
Drain plug
Seal
Supporting disc
Pinion shaft bearing
Pinion shaft bearing
Circlip
Locking cap
Shim
Supporting disc
Gear case
Locking cap
Spacer
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS

Bearings all
Gaskets all
Shims all
Seals all
Seal Plugs all
IMPORTANT!
When ordering parts, it is necessary to have the NORD SERIAL NUMBER from the unit the parts are for. The serial
number will dictate the correct parts for that particular unit. The gearbox nameplate will have the serial number on it.
BIM 1020/2005/03
Page 8 of 12
www.nord.com
PARTS LIST
SK 1382 - SK 5382
5
27
28
29
30
45
46
48
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
203
204
206
207
208
223
229
234
235
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
254
SK 6382 - SK 11382
BIM 1020/2005/03
Page 9 of 12
Driving gear
Hexagon screw
Seal
Supporting disc
Third reduction
gearcase
Ball bearing
Key
Ball bearing
Circlip
Key
Circlip
Intermediate shaft,
plain
Intermediate shaft,
gearcut
Circlip
Circlip
Shim
Circlip
Circlip
Drain plug
Seal
Driving gea
Pinion shaft
SK 6382 - SK 9382
Driving pinion
Output shaft
Key
Locking cap
Supporting disc
Drain plug
Seal
Circlip
Ball bearing
Key
Shim
Ball bearing
Supporting disc
Locking cap
Spacer
www.nord.com
PARTS LIST
SK 1282/02 - SK11382/52
109
112
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
124
125
207
208
216
223
251
252
253
Shaft seal
Ball bearing
Intermediate flange
Washer
Hexagon screw
Washer
Hexagon screw
Intermediate shaft,
plain
Intermediate shaft,
gearcut
Bearing sleeve
Circlip
Circlip
Output shaft
Key
Flange
Locking cap
Shrink disc
connector
Torque arm
Socket head screw
SK 1282 - SK11282
SK 1382 - SK11382
BIM 1020/2005/03
Page 10 of 12
www.nord.com
NOTES
BIM 1020/2005/03
Page 11 of 12
www.nord.com
TROUBLE SHOOTING
PROBLEM WITH THE REDUCER
Overloading
POSSIBLE CAUSES
Load exceeds the capacity of the
reducer
Insufficient lubrication
Runs Hot
Improper lubrication
Excessive lubrication
Wrong lubrication
Loose foundation bolts
Runs Noisy
Worn RV Disc
Failure of Bearings
Insufficient Lubricant
Output Shaft
Does Not Turn
Internal parts are broken
Weak mounting structure

Loose hold down bolts
Overloading unit may result in
damage to disc
May be due to lack of lubricant
Overload
Level of lubricant in the reducer not
properly maintained.
Overloading of reducer can cause
damage.
Key missing or sheared off on input
shaft.
Coupling loose or disconnected.
Worn Seals
Caused by dirt or grit entering seal.

Overfilled reducer.
Oil Leakage
Autovent clogged.
Improper mounting position, such as
wall or ceiling mount of horizontal
reducer.
BIM 1020/2005/03
Page 12 of 12
SUGGESTED REMEDY
Check rated capacity of reducer, replace
with unit of sufficient capacity or reduce
load
Check lubricant level and adjust up to
recommended levels
Check lubricant level and adjust down to
recommended levels
Flush out and refill with correct lubricant as
recommended
Inspect mounting of reducer. Tighten loose
bolts and/ or reinforce mounting and
structure
Tighten bolts
Disassemble and replace disc. Recheck
rated capacity of reducer.
Replace bearing. Clean and flush reducer
and fill with recommended lubricant.
Check rated capacity of reducer.
Check lubricant level and adjust to factory
recommended level.
Replace broken parts. Check rated capacity
of reducer.
Replace key.
Properly align reducer and coupling.
Tighten coupling.
Replace seals. Autovent may be clogged.
Replace or clean.
Check lubricant level and adjust to
recommended level.
Clean or replace, being sure to prevent any
dirt from falling into the reducer.
Check mounting position. Name tag & verify
with mounting chart in manual.
www.nord.com
NORD Gearbox Inputs
BIM 1009
Installation and Maintenance Instructions
USA
Retain These Safety Instructions For Future Use
CDN
WARNING:
LOCK OUT POWER before

any maintenance is
performed. Make absolutely
sure that no voltage is
applied while work is being
done on the gearbox.
NEMA/ IEC Motor Adapters
NORD Gear supplies a coupling that is to be mounted onto the motor shaft. It is important that the coupling is properly
positioned. For NEMA Input Adapters, follow the Motor Installation Instructions below to insure full coupling engagement
onto the input shaft. For IEC Input Adapters, the supplied coupling will mount directly against the motor shaft shoulder.
No locating measurements need to be taken. NOTE: Some of the larger IEC inputs will have a coupling spacer included to
help locate the coupling. Slide the spacer against the motor shaft shoulder, slide the coupling against the spacer and tighten set screw(s).
For the larger motor adapters (IEC160 / N250TC and larger), an Automatic Lubricator is supplied. This will need to be activated at the
time of startup. For operation and activation instructions, refer to the Automatic Lubricator section.
NORD supplies three different types of couplings depending on the size of input: J style, M style and Jaw style coupling. Following are
instructions on how to properly mount each type of coupling onto the motor. First, identify which coupling has been supplied to you by
referring to the Couplings for the NEMA and IEC Adapters section on the next page. Make sure the motor flange and shaft are cleaned and
verify that the proper key is in the motor shaft.
J Style Coupling
NEMA C-face Motor Installation Instructions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
M Style Coupling
NEMA C-face Motor Installation Instructions
Measure the distance from the face of the input adapter to

the face of the splined shaft and record that measurement.
Subtract 0.08 (~2mm) from the distance. This needs to
be done so that the coupling will not be preloaded after
installation!
Use that measurement to locate the coupling from the face
of the motor onto the shaft.
Once in place, tighten the set screw to lock the coupling in
place. It is recommended that the key is staked or bonded
(Loctite) in place to prohibit the key from vibrating out.
Mount the motor onto the input adapter with customer
supplied bolts. Make sure that the coupling from the adapter
and the motor engage securely. Use lock washers or Loctite
to prohibit bolts from becoming loose from vibration.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Measure the distance from the face of the input adapter to

the face of the splined shaft and record that measurement.
Subtract 0.31 (~8mm) from the distance. This needs to
be done so that the coupling will not be preloaded after
installation!
Use that measurement to locate the coupling from the face
of the motor onto the shaft.
Once in place, tighten the set screw to lock the coupling in
place. It is recommended that the key is staked or bonded
(Loctite) in place to prohibit the key from vibrating out.
Mount the motor onto the input adapter with customer
supplied bolts. Make sure that the coupling from the adapter
and the motor engage securely. Use lock washers or Loctite
to prohibit bolts from becoming loose from vibration.
"#
BIM 1009/2005/10
Page 1 of 8
www.nord.com
Couplings for the NEMA and IEC Adapters
Depending on the size of the input adapter to the gearbox, NORD Gear supplies two styles of couplings - BoWex (gear tooth) and Rotex
(jaw) couplings.
BoWex Couplings
NORD C-face adapter input shafts have a machined spline on the end. NORD incorporates two styles of BoWex couplings, the J and M
styles. The J style is a one-piece coupling with a metal hub and nylon spline. The M style is a two-piece coupling the metal hub and a
nylon sleeve. Nylon and steel components allow them to operate in high ambient temperatures without lubrication or maintenance.
Nylon sleeves resist dirt, moisture, most chemicals and petroleum products
No lubrication required
Operating Conditions: -22F - 195F (-30C - 90C)
Higher temperature coupling sleeve available up to 250F (120C)
Special bore available
BoWex Mechanical Ratings

J Style
Coupling
Type
M Style
Coupling
Type
Available
Bore Sizes
11, 14 mm
5/8 in.
Cont. / Peak
Torque
10 / 20 Nm
89 / 177 lb-in
IEC 63, 71
NEMA 56C
J24
19, 24 mm
5/8, 7/8 in
20 / 40 Nm
177 / 354 lb-in
IEC 80, 90
NEMA 56C,140TC
M38
J28
28mm
1-1/8 in
45 / 90 Nm
399 / 797 lb-in
IEC 100, 112

NEMA 180TC
M42
J14
Input
M14/M24/M28
Available
Bore Sizes
Same as
J style
Cont. / Peak
Torque
Same as
J style
38 mm
1-1/8, 1-3/8 in.
80 / 160 Nm
708 / 1,416 lb-in
42 mm
1-5/8 in
48 mm
1-7/8 in
100 / 200 Nm
885 / 1,770 lb-in
140 / 280 Nm
1240 / 2,478 lb-in
M48
Input
Same as
J style
IEC 132
NEMA 180TC,
210TC
IEC 160
NEMA 250TC
IEC 180
NEMA 280TC
Rotex Couplings
The cast iron jaw type couplings have an integral urethane spider that
provides smooth transmission of the motor torque. A set screw on the
coupling prohibits axial movement along the motor shaft.
Excellent shock and vibration dampening

Excellent resistance to oils and most chemicals
No metal-to-metal contact
Operating Conditions: -40F - 195F (-40C - 90C)
Higher temperature material (Hytrel) spider available up to 230F
(110C)
Special bores available
Rotex Mechanical Ratings

Coupling
Available
Type
Bore Sizes
1.89 (48mm)
Max Bore
2.44 (62mm)
Max Bore
Continuous / Peak
Torque
17 / 34 Nm
150 / 300 lb-in
60 / 120 Nm
530 / 1,060 lb-in
95 / 190 Nm
840 / 1,680 lb-in
190 / 382 Nm
1,680 / 3,380 lb-in
310 / 620 Nm
2,740 / 5,480 lb-in
42, 48 mm
1-5/8, 1-7/8 in
310 / 620 Nm
2,740 / 5,485 lb-in
60 mm
2-1/8, 2-3/8 in
65, 75, 80 mm
2-1/8, 2-3/8 in
625 / 1,250 Nm
5,530 / 11,060 lb-in
2,400 / 4,800 Nm
21,240 / 42,480 lb-in
R19
14, 19 mm
R24
19, 24 mm
R28
32, 38 mm
R38
R42
R48
R65
R90
BIM 1009/2005/10
Hub Design 1
Page 2 of 8
Inputs Used With

SEK/SEP 100
SEK/SEP 100, 130
Spider
Hub Design 1a
Spider
Urethane
98 Shore A Hardness
Color: Red
SEK/SEP 165, 215

IEC 160, 180
NEMA 250T, 280T
SEK/SEP 300, 215
IEC 225
NEMA 320T, 360T
IEC 250, 280, 315
NEMA 360T, 400TS, 440TS
Urethane
92 Shore A Hardness
Color: Yellow
www.nord.com
Jaw Style Coupling

NEMA C-face Installation Instructions
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Measure the distance from the face of the input adapter to the face
of the coupling as shown and record that measurement.
Subtract the X dimension from the measured distance.
This
needs to be done so that the coupling will not be preloaded
after installation!
Use that measurement to locate the coupling from the face of the
motor onto the shaft.
The metal portion of the coupling should be heated up prior to
assembly, generally 250F to 300F (120C to 150C).
*DO
NOT HEAT THE URETHANE SPIDER.
Once in place, tighten the setscrew to lock coupling in place. Let
the coupling cool down before placing the spider into the jaws. It is
recommended that the key is staked or bonded (Loctite) in place to
prohibit the key from vibrating out.
Mount the motor onto the input adapter with customer supplied
bolts. Make sure that the coupling from the adapter and the motor
engage securely. Use lock washers or Loctite to prohibit bolts from
becoming loose from vibration.
Coupling
Size
R14
X
(Subtract this value from measured distance)
0.06 (1.5mm)
R19 & R24
0.08 (2.0mm)
R28
0.10 (2.5mm)
R38/42
0.12 (3.0mm)
R48
0.14 (3.5mm)
R65
0.18 (4.5mm)
R90
0.22 (5.5mm)
%&& '()*&
Automatic Lubricator
NORD Gear supplies the larger C-face motor adapters with an Automatic Lubricator. This will provide
additional grease lubrication to the outboard bearing. As the pressure from the lubricator canistor pushes
the new grease into the bearing, the old grease will flow into the cavity towards the gearbox. When the
cavity is filled with the "used" grease, the pressure from the new grease pushes the used grease into the
gear box thru the input seal. The old grease mixes with the oil but will not cause harm to the gearing or
bearings. Regular oil changes with the gearbox will remove the old grease which has been pushed into
the gearbox. Refer to the PARTS LISTS for inputs equipped with the Automatic Lubricator.
Principle of Operation
After tightening the plastic activating screw, the Zinc-Molybdenum pellet drops into the Citric
Acid electrolyte. The chemical reaction builds up pressure that causes the piston to move
forward. The lubricant is continuously injected into the lubrication point. At the end of the
lubrication period, the discharge indicator cap becomes clearly visible indicating the lubricant
has been fully discharged. The lubrication period is determined and defined by the color of the
activating screw.
For the bearings used in NORD Gear products, a 12-month lubrication period is standard,
indicated by a gray activating screw. This applies for an average operating time of 8
hours/day. For longer operating times, the replacement interval decreases to 6 months.
Lubrication canisters are also available for cold temperature applications. Contact NORD Gear
for more information.
Assembly Instructions
1.
2.
3.
4.
Remove the plug from the male connecting thread.

Screw male fitting into bearing housing within Input Adapter.
Insert activating screw into end of canister. Tighten until the ring-eyelet breaks off.
Replace every twelve months.
Perma Classic Specifications

Standard Lubricant
Klber Petamo GHY 133 (synthetic)
NORD Part Number

Lubricant Volume
Operating Temperature Range
Discharge Time
28301000
120 mL (4 oz.)
-30C to 150C (-22F to 302F)
12 months at 25C (77F)
Independent of mounting position, operates even
under water.
1/4 NPT
Operating Position
Male Connecting Thread
The temperature range shown is for the Perma Classic Lubricator only and does
not apply to other components and/or lubricants within the gear reducer.
BIM 1009/2005/10
Page 3 of 8
www.nord.com
MK Motor Mount Platform

For proper installation of the belt drive, consult the V-belts
manufacturer. NORD MK motor mounts are adjustable in
two ways. Slotted holes are provided at the input cylinder
for the initial height adjustment. There are two fine
adjustments at the Yolk to increase/decrease tension.
Two Spanner head wrenches will be needed to
tighten/loosen the fine adjustments.
The four bolts
holding the motor platform to the input cylinder must be
loosened in order to use the fine adjustments.
YOKE
(FINE ADJUSTMENT)
The motor mounting platform has tapped holes to accept the foot pattern of the
standard footed NEMA or IEC motor. All MK mounting input shaft diameters
are metric.
BOLTS (4)
SLOTTED HOLES (4)
Align the sheaves or sprockets square and paraIIeI by placing a straight edge across their faces. Alignment of bushed sheaves and sprockets
should be checked after bushings have been tightened. Check horizontal shaft alignment by placing a IeveI vertically against the face of the
sheave or sprocket. Adjust beIt or chain tension per the manufacturers specified procedure. After a period of operation, recheck alignment
and adjust as required.
WARNING:
NORD Gear does not furnish the safety guards for the traction mechanism. It is the
responsibility of the customer to install a safety guard to conform to OSHA standards.
Solid Shaft (W-Type)
The shaft will be inch or metric, depending on how the unit was
ordered. Measure and verify the shaft before mounting anything
on the shaft. Below are the tolerances used for the solid shafts.
All solid input shafts have a tapped hole on the end for customer
use. The chart below indicated the tap size for each shaft. Keys
are also supplied with solid shaft.
Outboard pinion and sprocket fits should be as recommended by the manufacturer.
The components should be heated according to the manufacturers
recommendations, generaIIy 250F to 300F, (120C to 150C) before assembling to
the shaft. The coupling hub or sprocket should be mounted per Figure 1.
On larger gearboxes (SK62, SK6282, SK9062.1), there is grease fitting on the WType inputs to grease the outboard bearing. About 0.75 ounce (20 - 25g) of synthetic
grease should be added every 4,000 service hours. There is a sticker adjacent to the
grease fitting detailing which grease should be used. USE ONLY SYNTHETIC
GREASE NOT MINERAL.
Figure 1. Mounting a coupling or a sprocket

on a shaft.
Output and Input Shaft Diameter Tolerance

Metric (mm)
18 = +0.012/+0.001
> 18 30 = +0.015/+0.002
> 30 50 = +0.018/+0.002
> 50 80 = +0.030/+0.011
> 80 120 = +0.035/+0.013
> 120 180 = +0.040/+0.015
Inch
1.750 = +0.0000/-0.0005
> 1.750 = +0.0000/-0.0010
Solid Shaft DriII and Tap Shaft End

Metric (mm)
16 = M5
> 16 21 = M6
> 21 24 = M8
> 24 30 = M10
> 30 38 = M12
> 38 50 = M16
> 50 85 = M20
> 85 130 = M24
BIM 1009/2005/10
Inch
0.500 = #10-24 x 0.4 deep
> 0.500 0.875 = -20 x 0.6 deep
> 0.875 0.938 = 5/16-18 x 0.7 deep
> 0.938 1.100 = 3/8-16 x 0.9 deep
> 1.100 1.300 = 1/2-13 x 1.1 deep
> 1.300 1.875 = 5/8-11 x 1.4 deep
> 1.875 3.500 = 3/4-10 x 1.7 deep
> 3.500
= 1-8 x 2.2 deep
Page 4 of 8
www.nord.com
Sugar Scoop
Each sugar scoop includes the coupling for the motor

and the coupling guard. The coupling guard must be
mounted when the machine is in use. NORDs standard
supplied coupling is the jaw type. Make sure the set
screw is tighten after coupling is in place. The coupling
hub or sprocket should be mounted per Figure 2.
Figure 2. Place coupling flush with end of

motor shaft and tighten setscrew.
Motor Installation Instructions

1. Make sure that the motor shaft is clean
2. Mount the coupling onto the motor. Place the coupling so that the inside face is flush with the end of the motor shaft (see Figure 2). The
coupling should be heated prior to assembly, generally 250F to 300F (120C to 150C). *DO NOT HEAT THE URETHANE SPIDER.
Once in place, tighten the setscrew into the motor shaft to lock coupling in place.
3. Let the coupling cool down before mounting the spider into the jaws. The spider should not be under axial compression when installed.
4. Place the motor onto the scoop and engage the couplings together. The scoop has slotted holes for axial alignment.
**The motor and input shaft must be aligned in all directions to assure proper operation of the system.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Before tightening the motor feet down, check the coupling alignment with a straight edge or a level. Maximum parallel misalignment
should not exceed 0.015 and angular misalignment should be held to 1.5. Shim the motor feet to align the couplings. Careful
alignment extends the life of not only the coupling but all the components of the drive train.
Once aligned, tighten the bolts on the feet to the scoop. Check the coupling alignment again due to compression of the shims.
Mount the supplied coupling guard to the scoop.
After a period of operation, recheck alignment and adjust as required.
NOTES
BIM 1009/2005/10
Page 5 of 8
www.nord.com
PARTS LIST
INPUTS FOR NORDBLOC GEARBOXES
C-FACE INPUTS FOR

SK172 SK973
&
SK92072 SK92773
W-TYPE INPUTS FOR

SK172 SK973
&
SK92072 SK92773
BIM 1009/2005/10
Page 6 of 8
www.nord.com
PARTS LIST
C-FACE INPUTS FOR UNICASE GEARBOXES
IEC 63 IEC 112
IEC 132 IEC 180
NEMA 250TC 400TC

IEC 160 IEC 315
RECOMMENDED SPARE PARTS

Bearings all
Gaskets all
Shims all
Seals all
Seal Plugs all
IMPORTANT!
When ordering parts, it is necessary to have the NORD SERIAL NUMBER from the unit the parts are for. The serial
number will dictate the correct parts for that particular unit. The gearbox nameplate will have the serial number on it.
BIM 1009/2005/10
Page 7 of 8
www.nord.com
PARTS LIST
W-TYPE INPUTS FOR UNICASE GEARBOXES
BIM 1009/2005/10
Page 8 of 8
www.nord.com
260.02/1199 E
INSTALLATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
FOR NEMA LOW VOLTAGE
ELECTRIC MOTORS
T
he electric motor is the item of equipment most

widely used by man in his pursuit of progress, as
virtually all machines and many renowned inventions
depend upon it.
By virtue of the prominent role the electric motor
plays in the comfort and welfare of mankind, it must
be regarded and treated as a prime power unit
embodying features that merit special attention,
including its installation and maintenance.
This means that the electric motor should receive
proper attention.
Its installation and routine maintenance require
specific care to ensure perfect operation and longer
life of the unit.
THE WEG ELECTRIC MOTOR INSTALLATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUAL provides the necessary
information to properly install, maintain and preserve
the most important component of all equipment:
THE ELECTRIC MOTOR!
WEG
INSTALLATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

FOR NEMA LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRIC MOTORS

Contents
1 - Introduction .................................................................. 03
2 - Basic Instructions ........................................................ 05
2.1 Safety Instructions ....................................................... 05
2.2 Delivery .................................................................. 05
2.3 Storage .................................................................. 05
2.3.1 Drying the Windings .................................... 06
3 - Installation 07
3.1 Mechanical Aspects .................................................. 07
3.1.1 Foundation ................................................. 07
3.1.2 Types of bases ........................................... 07
3.1.3 Alignment .................................................... 08
3.1.4 Coupling ..................................................... 09
3.1.5 Bearing Load (Stresses on the bearings) .... 10
3.2 Electrical Aspects ...................................................... 16
3.2.1 Feed System .............................................. 16
3.2.2 Starting of Electric Motors ............................ 16
3.2.3 Motor Protection .......................................... 18
3.3 Start-up 19
3.3.1 Preliminary Inspection ................................. 19
3.3.2 The First Start-up ........................................ 21
3.3.3 Operation ................................................... 21
3.3.4 Stopping ..................................................... 21
4 - Maintenance .................................................................. 25
4.1 Cleanliness .............................................................. 25
4.2 Lubrication ............................................................... 25
4.2.1 Periodical Lubrication .................................. 25
4.2.2 Quality and Quantity of Grease .................... 25
4.2.3 Lubricating Instructions ................................ 25
4.2.4 Replacement of Bearings ............................ 26
4.3 Air Gap Checking .................................................... 26
4.4 Explosion Proof Motor Repair Steps ......................... 27
4.4.1 Objective .................................................... 27
4.4.2 Repair Procedure and Precautions ............. 27
4.4.3 Miscellaneous Recommendations ................ 27
5 - Malfunctioning .............................................................. 28
5.1 Standard Three-phase Motor Failures ..................... 28
5.1.1 Short Circuits Between Turns ...................... 28
5.1.2 Winding Failures ......................................... 28
5.1.3 Rotor Failures ............................................. 29
5.1.4 Bearing Failures ......................................... 29
5.1.5 Shaft Fractures ........................................... 29
5.1.6 Unbalanced V-Belt Drives ........................... 29
5.1.7 Damage Arising from Poorly Fitted
Transmission Parts or
Improper Motor Alignment ........................... 29
5.2 Troubleshooting Chart ............................................. 30
6 - Spare Parts and Component Terminology ................. 31
3


1. Introduction
his manual covers all the three-phase

and single-phase asynchronous squirrel-cage
induction motors, from 140T to 580T frame
sizes.
The motors described in this manual are
subject to continuous improvement and all
information is subject to change without
notice.
For further details, please consult WEG.

2. Basic Instructions
2.1 Safety Instructions
All personnel involved with electrical installations, either handling,

lifting, operation and maintenance, should be well-informed and upto-date concerning the safety standards and principles that govern
the work and carefully follow them.
Before work commences, it is the responsibility of the person in
charge to ascertain that these have been duly complied with and to
alert his personnel of the inherent hazards of the job in hand.
It is recommended that these tasks be undertaken only by qualified
personnel and they should be instructed to:
avoid contact with energized circuits or rotating parts,
avoid by-passing or rendering inoperative any safeguards or
protective devices,
avoid extended exposure in close proximity to machinery with
high noise levels,
use proper care and procedures in handling, lifting, installing,
operating and maintaining the equipment, and
follow consistently any instructions and product documentation
supplied when they do such work.
Before initiating maintenance procedures, be sure that all power
sources are disconnected from the motor and accessories to avoid
electric shock.
Fire fighting equipment and notices concerning first aid should not
be lacking at the job site; these should be visible and accessible at
all times.
2.2 Delivery
Prior to shipment, motors are factory-tested and balanced. They

are packed in boxes or bolted to a wooden base.
Upon receipt, we recommend careful handling and a physical
examination for damage which may have occurred during
transportation.
In the event of damage and in order to guaranty insurance
coverage, both the nearest WEG sales office and the carrier should
be notified without delay.
2.3 Storage
Motors should be raised by their eyebolts and never by their

shafts. It is important that high rating three-phase motors be raised
by their eyebolts. Raising and lowering must be steady and joltless,
otherwise bearings may be harmed.
When motors are not immediately installed, they should be stored in
their normal upright position in a dry even temperature place, free
of dust, gases and corrosive atmosphere.
Other objects should not be placed on or against them.
Motors stored over long periods are subject to loss of insulation
resistance and oxidation of bearings.
Bearings and lubricant deserve special attention during
prolonged periods of storage. Depending on the length
and conditions of storage it may be necessary to regrease
or change rusted bearings. The weight of the rotor in an
inactive motor tends to expel grease from between the
bearing surfaces thereby removing the protective film that

impedes metal-to-metal contact.
As a preventive measure against the formation of corrosion
by contact, motors should not be stored near machines
which cause vibrations, and every 3 month their shafts
should be rotated manually.
Insulation resistance fluctuates widely with temperature and
humidity variations and the cleanliness of components. When a
motor is not immediately put into service it should be protected
against moist, high temperatures and impurities, thus avoiding
damage to insulation resistance.
If the motor has been in storage more than six month or has been
subjected to adverse moisture conditions, it is best to check the
insulation resistance of the stator winding with a megohmeter.
If the resistance is lower than ten megohms the windings should be
dried in one of the two following ways:
1) Bake in oven at temperatures not exceeding 194 degrees F
until insulation resistance becomes constant.
2) With rotor locked, apply low voltage and gradually increase
current through windings until temperature measured with
thermometer reaches 194 degrees F. Do not exceed this
temperature.
If the motor is stored for an extensive period, the rotor must be
periodically rotated.
Should the ambient conditions be very humid, a periodical
inspection is recommended during storage. It is difficult to prescribe
rules for the true insulation resistance value of a machine as
resistance varies according to the type, size and rated voltage and
the state of the insulation material used, method of construction and
the machines insulation antecedents. A lot of experience is
necessary in order to decide when a machine is ready or not to be
put into service. Periodical records are useful in making this
decision.
The following guidelines show the approximate values that can be
expected of a clean and dry motor, at 40C test voltage in applied
during one minute.
Insulation resistance Rm is obtained by the formula:
Rm = Vn + 1
Where: Rm - minimum recommended insulation resistance in M
W with winding at 40C
Vn - rated machine voltage in kV
In case the test is carried out at a temperature other than 40C, the
value must be corrected to 40C using an approximated curve of
insulation resistance v.s temperature of the winding with the aid of
Figure 2.1; its possible verify that resistance practically doubles
every 10C that insulating temperature is lowered.

Example:
Ambient temperature = 50C
Motor winding resistence at 50C = 1.02 M W
Correction to 40C
R 40C = R 50C x K 50C
R 40 C = 1.02 x 1.3
R 40 C = 1.326 M W
The minimum resistence Rm will be:
Rm = Vn + 1
Rm = 0.440 + 1
Rm = 1.440 M W
On new motors, lower values are often attained due to solvents
present in the insulating varnishes that later evaporate during
normal operation. This does not necessarily mean that the motor is
not operational, since insulating resistance will increase after a
period of service.
On motors which have been in service for a period of time much
larger values are often attained. A comparison of the values
recorded in previous tests on the same motor under similar load,
temperature and humidity conditions, serves as a better indication
of insulation condition than that of the value derived from a single
test. Any substantial or sudden reduction is suspect and the cause
determined and corrective action taken.
Insulation resistance is usually measured with a MEGGER.
In the event that insulation resistance is inferior to the values
derived from the above formula, motors should be subjected to a
drying process.
This operation should be carried out with maximum care, and only
by qualified personnel. The rate of temperature rise should not
exceed 5C per hour and the temperature of the winding should
not exceed 105C. An overly high final temperature as well as a
fast temperature increase rate can each generate vapour harmful
to the insulation.
Temperature should be accurately controlled during the drying
process and the insulation resistance measured at regular
intervals.
During the early stages of the drying process, insulation resistance
will decrease as a result of the temperature increase, but the
resistance will increase again when the insulation becomes dryer.
The drying process should be extended until sucessive
measurements of insulation resistance indicate that a constant value
above the minimum acceptable value has been attained. It is
extremely important that the interior of the motor be well ventilated
during the drying operation to ensure that the dampness is really
removed.
Heat for drying can be obtained from outside sources (an oven),
energization of the space heater (optional), or introducing a current

through the actual winding of the motor being dried.
Winding Temperature (C)
R40 C = Rt x Kt 40 C
Figure 2.1.

3. Installation
Electric machines should be installed in order to allow an easy
access for inspection and maintenance. Should the surrounding
atmosphere be humid, corrosive or contain flammable substances
or particles, it is essential to ensure an adequate degree of
protection.
The installation of motors in environments where there are
vapours, gases or dusts, flammable or combustible materials,
subject to fire or explosion, should be undertaken according to
appropriate and governing codes, such as NEC Art. 500 (National
Electrical Code) and UL-674 (Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.)
Standards.
Under no circumstances can motors be enclosed in boxes or
covered with materials which may impede or reduce the free
circulation of ventilating air. Machines fitted with external ventilation
should be at least 50cm from the wall to permit the passage of air.
The opening for the entry and exit of air flow should never be
obstructed or reduced by conductors, pipes or other objects.
The place of installation should allow for air renewal at a rate of 700
cubic feet per minute for each 75 HP motor capacity.
3.1 Mechanical Aspects

3.1.1 Foundation
F1 and F2
g
G
Tmax
A
Lateral stress (Lb)

Force of gravity (32.18 ft/s2)
Weight of motor (Lb)
Maximum torque (Lb . Ft)
Obtained from the dimensional drawing of the motor
(in)
Sunken bolts or metallic base plates should be used to secure the
motor to the base.
3.1.2 Types of Bases

a) Slide Rails
When motor drive is by pulleys the motor should be mounted on

slide rails and the lower part of the belt should be pulling.
The rail nearest the drive pulley is positioned in such a manner that
the adjusting bolt be between the motor and the driven machine.
The other rail should be positioned with the bolt in the opposite
position, as shown in Figure 3.2.
The motor is bolted to the rails and set on the base. The drive
pulley is aligned such that its center is on a plane with the center of
the driven pulley and the motor shaft and that of the machine be
parallel.
The belt should not be overly stretched, see Figure 3.11.
After the alignment, the rails are fixed.
The motor base must be levelled and as far as possible free of

vibrations. A concrete foundation is recommended for motors over
100 HP. The choice of base will depend upon the nature of the soil
at the place of erection or of the floor capacity in the case of
buildings.
When dimensioning the motor base, keep in mind that the motor
may occasionally be run at a torque above that of the rated full load
torque.
Based upon Figure 3.1, foundation stresses can be calculated by
using the following formula:
F1 = 0.2247 (0.009 x g x G - 213 Tmx/A)
F2 = 0.2247 (0.009 x g x G + 213 Tmax/A )
Figure 3.2 - Positioning of slide rails for motor alignment
Figure 3.1 - Base stresses
Where:
7

b) Foundation Studs
Very often, particularly when drive is by flexible coupling the motor

is anchored directly to the base with foundation studs.
It is recommended that shim plates of approximately 0.8 inches be
used between the foundation studs and the feet of the motor for
replacement purposes. These shim plates are useful when
exchanging one motor for another of larger shaft height due to
variations allowed by standard tolerances.
Foundation studs should neither be painted nor rusted as both
interfere with to the adherence of the concrete, and bring about
loosening.
After accurate alignment and levelling of the motor, the foundation
studs are cemented and their screws tightened to secure the motor.
Figure 3.5 - Alignment with dial gauges

Thus, simultaneous readings are possible and allow for checking
for any parallel (Figure 3.6a) and concentricity deviations (Figure
3.6b) by rotating the shafts one turn.
Gauge readings should not exceed 0.02 inches. If the installer is
sufficiently skilled, he can obtain alignment with feeler gauges and a
steel ruler, providing that the couplings are perfect and centered Figure 3.6c.
Figure 3.6a - Deviation
from parallel
Figure 3.6b - Deviation from

concentricity
Figure 3.6c - Alignment

with a steel ruler
Figure 3.3 - Motor mounted on a concrete base with foundation
studs
3.1.3 Alignment
The electric motor should be accurately aligned with the driven
machine, particularly in cases of direct coupling. An incorrect
alignment can cause bearing failure vibrations and even shaft
rupture.
The best way to ensure correct alignment is to use dial gauges
placed on each coupling half, one reading radially and the other
exially - Figure 3.5.

3.1.4 Coupling
Figure 3.8 - Pulley mounting device
a) Direct Coupling
Direct coupling is always preferable due to its lower cost, space
economy, no belt slippage and lower accident risk.
In the case of speed ratio drives, it is also common to use a direct
coupling with a reducer (gear box).
CAUTION: Carefully align the shaft ends using, whenever
feasible, a flexible coupling.
Figure 3.8a - Pulley extractor

Hammers should be avoided during the fitting of pulleys and
bearings. The fitting of bearings with the aid of hammers leaves
blemishes on the bearing races. These initially small flaws increase
with usage and can develop to a stage that completely impairs the
bearing.
The correct positioning of a pulley is shown in Figure 3.9.
Figure 3.7 - A type of direct coupling
b) Gear Coupling
Poorly aligned gear couplings are the cause of jerking motions

which bring about the vibration of the actual drive and vibrations
within the motor.
Therefore, due care must be given to perfect shaft alignment:
exactly parallel in the case of straight gears, and at the correct
angle for bevel or helical gears.
Perfect gear engagement can be checked by the insertion of a strip
of paper on which the teeth marks will be traced after a single
rotation.
Figure 3.9 - Correct positioning of pulley on the shaft
c) Belt and Pulley Coupling
Belt coupling is most commonly used when a speed ratio is

required.
Assembly of Pulleys: To assemble pulleys on shaft ends with a
keyway and threaded end holes the pulley should be inserted
halfway up the keyway merely by manual pressure.
On shafts without threaded end holes the heating of the pulley to
about 80C is recommended, or alternatively, the devices illustrated
in Figure 3.8 may be employed.

RUNNING: To avoid needless radial stresses on the bearings it is
imperative that shafts are parallel and the pulleys perfectly aligned.
(Figure 3.10).
(Figure 3.11).
Pulleys that are too small should be avoided; these cause shaft
flexion because belt traction increases in proportion to a decrease
in the pulley size. Table 1 determines minimum pulley diameters,
and Tables 2 and 3 refer to the maximum stresses acceptable on
motor bearings up to frame 580. Beyond frame size 600, an
Figure 3.10 - Correct pulley alignment

Laterally misaligned pulleys, when running, transmit alternating
knocks to the rotor and can damage the bearing housing. Belt
slippage can be avoided by applying a resin (rosin for example).
Belt tension should be sufficient to avoid slippage during operation
analysis should be requested from the WEG engineering.

Figure 3.11 - Belt tensions
Table 1 - Minimum pitch diameter of pulleys

Ball bearings
Frame
Bearing
140
W 180
180
W 210
210
W 250
250
280
320
360
6205-Z
6206-Z
6307-Z
6308-Z
6308-Z
6309 C3
6309 C3
6311 C3
6312 C3
6314 C3
Frame
Poles
Size X Inches
0.79
1.7
3.03
1.69
1.57
1.85
3.23
1.81
2.86
2.90
4.37
4.41
2.36
2
3.46
1.93
3.00
3.06
4.54
4.59
5.08
7.44
8.73
3.15
3.94
4.72
3.16
3.22
4.72
4.77
5.19
7.76
9.00
4.92
4.97
5.47
7.94
9.28
5.65
8.18
9.57
Ball Bearing
400
440
500
5008
580
Important:
10
Bearing
II
6314 C3
IV-VI-VII
6314 C3
II
6314 C3
IV-VI-VIII
6319 C3
II
6314 C3
IV-VI-VIII
6319 C3
II
6314 C3
IV-VI-VIII
6322 C3
II
6314 C3
IV-VI-VIII
6322 C3
Roller Bearing
Size X Inches
1.97
3.15
4.33
5.51
7.3
7.62
7.94
8.24
11.75
12.16
12.61
13.08
23.54
24.34
25.12
25.87
44.66
45.79
46.98
48.23
57
58
59
60
Bearing
NU 316
NU 319
NU 319
NU 322
NU 322
Size X Inches
1.97
3.15
4.33
5.51
6.69
8.27
4.13
4.31
4.49
4.67
4.85
4.02
4.17
4.32
4.47
4.62
4.82
6.52
6.73
6.95
7.17
7.39
7.67
8.73
8.95
9.96
11.34
12.87
14.82
10.72
10.91
11.11
11.31
11.50
11.76
1) Peripheral speeds for solid grey cast iron pulleys FC 200 is V = 115 ft/s
2) Use steel pulleys when peripheral speed is higher than 115 ft/s
3) V-belt speed should not exceed 115 ft/s.

Table 2 - Maximum acceptable radial load (Lbf)
Nema 56 Motors
Saw Arbor Motors
Radial Force (Lbf)

Frame
Distance X
Poles
56A
56B
56D
1,18
II
88
59
IV
88
59
II
88
59
IV
86
59
II
127
70
IV
141
70
80 LMS
II
355
80 MMS
II
359
II
80 SMS
90 LMS
II
IV
357
427
555
Table 3 - Maximum acceptable axial load (Lbf)

IP55 Totally Enclosed Motors - 60Hz
Position / Construction Form
F
R
A
M
E
140
W 180
180
W 210
210
W 250
250
280
320
360
400
440
500
5008
II
103
108
149
196
189
282
273
355
374
890
877
842
769
791
IV
141
145
207
264
257
372
368
480
498
1,181
1,148
1,303
1,250
1624
VI
167
180
249
326
315
443
436
551
588
1,144
1,347
1,563
1,481
1909
VIII
187
202
286
368
357
485
485
624
668
1,323
1,521
1,821
1,728
2137
II
112
154
269
329
324
471
463
621
703
890
877
842
769
791
IV
152
209
370
447
443
620
615
826
930
1,181
1,148
1,303
1,250
1624
VI
185
255
443
544
533
734
727
959
1,091
1,375
1,347
1,563
1,481
1909
VIII
207
286
500
610
599
811
813
1,082
1,232
1,552
1,521
1,821
1,728
2137
II
99
94
136
176
160
240
220
275
266
745
705
568
355
728
IV
132
130
189
238
220
317
310
388
366
985
890
884
721
1548
VI
158
165
229
297
275
394
379
427
432
1,144
1,060
1,109
844
1808
VIII
178
183
266
339
310
414
421
502
511
1,323
1,241
1,488
1,190
2029
II
105
141
253
310
295
430
410
540
597
745
705
568
355
728
IV
143
194
352
421
405
564
557
736
793
985
890
884
721
1548
VI
174
240
421
518
493
685
672
838
937
1,144
1,060
1,109
844
1808
VIII
198
269
480
582
553
743
749
961
1,078
1,323
1,241
1,488
1,109
2029
580
679
1,406
1,649
1,865
679
1,406
1,649
1,865
033
474
549
597
033
474
549
597
Open Motors - NEMA 56 Frames - 60Hz

Position / Construction Form
F
R
A
M
E
II
IV
II
IV
II
IV
II
IV
56 A
68
90
83
112
63
85
79
108
56 B
66
90
81
110
63
83
77
105
56 D
63
88
105
145
59
81
101
138
11

The maximum radial load for each frame are determined, by
graphs.
INSTRUCTIONS ON HOW TO USE THE GRAPHS
1 - Maximum radial load on shaft.
2 - Maximum radial load on bearings.
Where: X - Half of pulley width (inches)
Fr- Maximum radial load in relation to the diameter and
pulley width.
Example:
Verify whether a 2HP motor, II Pole, 60Hz withstands a radial load
of 110Lb, considering a pulley width of 4 inches.
Frame : 145T
Fr
: 110Lb
X
: 2 inches
1 - Mark the distance X
2 - Find out line N = 3600 for bearing
Based on the above, this bearing withstands a radial load of

130Lb.
12

13

14

Note:For frames 600 and above, consult your engineering

representative.
15

3.2 Electrical Aspects

3.2.1 Feed System
Proper electric power supply is very important. The choice of motor

feed conductors, whether branch or distribution circuits, should be
based on the rated current of the motors as per NFPA-70 Standard
article 430.
Tables 4, 5 and 6 show minimum conductor gauges sized
according to maximum current capacity and maximum voltage drop
in relation to the distance from the distribution center to the motor,
and to the type of installation (Overhead or in ducts).
To determine the conductor gauge proceed as follows:
a) Determine the current by multiplying the current indicated on the
motor nameplate by 1.25 and then locate the resulting value on the
corresponding table.
If the conductor feeds more than one motor, the value to be sought
on the table should be equal 1.25 times the rated current of the
largest motor plus the rated current of the other motors.
In the case of variable speed motors, the highest value among the
rated currents should be considered.
When motor operation is intermittent, the conductors should have a
current carrying capacity equal or greater, to the product of the
motor rated current times the running cycle factor shown on Table
7.
Table 7 - Running cycle factor
Motor short
time
rating
5min
15min
30 at
60min
Continuous
Short (operating valves,

activating contacts etc)
1.10
1.20
1.50
Intermittent (passenger or
freight elevators, tools,
pumps, rolling bridges etc)
0.85
0.85
0.90
1.40
Cyclic (rolling mills,

mining machines etc)
0.85
0.90
0.95
1.40
Variable
1.10
1.20
1.50
2.00
Duty
Classification
16
b) Locate the rated voltage of the motor and the feed network
distance in the upper part of the corresponding table. The point of
intersection of the distance column and the line referring to current
will indicate the minimum required gauge of the conductor.
Example:
Size the conductors for a 15 HP, three-phase, 230V, 42A, motor
located 200 feet from the main supply with cables laid in conduits.
a) Current to be located: 1.25 x 42A = 52.5A
b) Closest value on table 6:55A
c) Minimum gauge: 6 AWG
3.2.2 Starting of Electric Motor
Induction motors can be started by the following methods:
Direct Starting
Whenever possible a three-phase motor with a squirrel cage rotor

should be started directly at full supply voltage by means of a
contactor (Connection diagram a). This method is called Direct-onLine (DoL) starting.

Table 4 - Wire and cable gauges for single-phase motor installation (voltage drop < 5%) (in conduits)
Supply Voltage
115
230
460
575
Distance of motor from distribution centre (feet)

34
69
138
170
51
102
204
250
69
138
276
338
85
170
340
420
102
204
408
501
137
274
548
670
Current (A)
5
10
15
20
30
40
55
70
95
171
342
684
840
205
410
820
1010
240
480
960
1181
273
546
1092
1342
308
616
1232
1515
342
684
1368
1680
428
856
1712
2105
514
1028
2056
2530
12
8
6
6
4
2
1/0
1/0
2/0
12
8
6
4
2
2
1/0
2/0
3/0
10
8
6
4
2
2
1/0
2/0
3/0
10
6
4
4
2
1/0
1/0
2/0
4/0
8
6
2
2
1/0
2/0
2/0
2/0
250M
Cable gauge (conductor)

14
14
12
12
10
8
6
4
2
14
14
12
12
10
8
6
4
2
14
14
12
12
10
8
6
4
2
14
14
12
10
8
8
6
4
2
14
12
12
10
8
6
6
4
2
14
12
10
8
6
6
4
2
2
14
10
8
8
6
4
4
2
1/0
12
10
8
6
6
4
2
2
1/0
12
10
6
6
4
2
2
1/0
1/0
Table 5 - Wire and cable gauges for three-phase motor installation - aerial conductors with 25cm spacing (voltage drop < 5%)
Supply Voltage
115
230
460
575

51
102
204
250
69
138
276
338
85
170
340
420
102
204
408
501
137
274
547
670
171
342
684
840
Current (A)
15
20
30
40
55
70
100
130
175
225
275
320
205
410
820
1010
240
480
960
1181
273
546
1092
1342
308
616
1232
1515
342
684
1368
1680
428
856
1712
2105
514
1028
2056
2530
685
1370
2740
3350
8
6
4
2
2
1/0
4/0
------
8
6
4
2
1/0
2/0
4/0
------
6
4
2
2
2/0
3/0
-------
6
4
2
1/0
3/0
--------
4
2
1/0
2/0
---------

14
14
14
12
10
8
6
4
2
1/0
2/0
3/0
14
14
12
10
10
8
6
4
2
1/0
2/0
3/0
14
12
10
10
8
6
4
4
2
1/0
2/0
3/0
12
12
8
8
8
6
4
2
1/0
2/0
4/0
4/0
12
10
8
8
6
4
2
1/0
2/0
3/0
---
10
10
8
6
4
2
2
1/0
3/0
----
10
8
6
4
4
2
1/0
2/0
-----
10
8
6
4
2
2
2/0
4/0
-----
8
8
4
4
2
1/0
3/0
------
Table 6 - Wire and cable gauges for three-phase motor installation (voltage drop < 5%) (in conduits)
Supply Voltage
115
230
460
575

85
170
340
420
102
204
408
501
120
240
480
590
137
274
548
670
171
342
684
840
12
12
10
8
6
4
2
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
250M
300M
350M
400M
500M
12
10
8
8
6
4
2
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
250M
300M
350M
400M
500M
12
10
8
6
6
4
2
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
250M
300M
350M
400M
500M
10
10
8
6
4
4
2
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
250M
300M
350M
400M
500M
10
8
6
6
4
2
2
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
250M
300M
350M
400M
500M
Current (A)
15
20
30
40
55
70
95
125
145
165
195
215
240
265
280
320
205
410
820
1010
240
480
960
1181
273
546
1092
1342
308
616
1232
1515
342
684
1368
1680
428
856
1712
2105
514
1028
2056
2530
6
6
4
2
2
1/0
1/0
3/0
3/0
4/0
250M
250M
300M
350M
400M
500M
6
6
4
2
1/0
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
4/0
250M
300M
300M
350M
400M
500M
6
4
2
2
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
250M
250M
300M
350M
400M
500M
400M
500M
4
4
2
1/0
1/0
2/0
4/0
250M
300M
350M
350M
400M
500M
500M
---

8
8
6
4
4
2
1/0
1/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
250M
300M
350M
400M
500M
8
6
6
4
2
2
1/0
2/0
2/0
3/0
4/0
250M
300M
350M
400M
500M
8
6
4
4
2
1/0
1/0
2/0
3/0
3/0
4/0
250M
300M
350M
400M
500M
Note: The above indicated values are orientative. For guaranteed values, contact the Local Power Company.
17

There are DOL starter assemblies available combining a threepole contactor, a bimetal relay (overload protection device), and a
fuse (short circuit protection on branch circuit).
DOL starting is the simplest method, only feasible however, when
the locked rotor current (LRC) does not influence the main electric
supply lines.
Initial locked rotor current (LRC) in induction motors reach values
six to eight times the value of the full load current. During starting by
the DOL method, starting current can reach these high levels. The
main electrical supply should be rated sufficiently, such that during
the starting cycle no supply disturbance to others on the power
network is caused by the voltage drop in the main supply.
This can be achieved under one of the following situations:
a) The rated main supply current is high enough for the locked
rotor current not to be proportionally high;
b) Motor locked rotor current is low with no effect on the networks.
c) The motor is started under no-load conditions with a short
starting cycle and, consequently, a low locked rotor current with
a transient voltage drop tolerable to other consumers.
Starting with a compensating switch

(auto-transformer starting)
Should direct on line starting not be possible, either due to

restrictions imposed by the power supply authority or due to the
installation itself, reduced voltage indirect starting methods can be
employed to lower the locked rotor current. The single line
connection diagram (C) shows the basic components of a
compensating switch featuring a transformer (usually an autotransformer) with a series of taps corresponding to the different
values of the reduced voltage. Only three terminals of the motor are
connected to the switch, the other being interconnected as per
diagram, for the indicated voltage.
Star-Delta starting
It is fundamental to star-delta starting that the three-phase motor has

the necessary numbers of leads for both connections:
6 leads for Y/D
or 12 leads for YY/DD
All the connections for the various voltages are made through
terminals in the terminal box in accordance with the wiring diagram
that accompanies the motor. This diagram may be shown on the
nameplate or in the terminal box.
The star-delta connection is usually used only in low-voltage
motors due to normally available control and protection devices. In
this method of starting the locked rotor current is approximately
30% of the original LRC. The locked rotor torque is reduced
proportionally as well. For this reason, it is very important before
deciding to use star-delta starting to verify if the reduced locked
rotor torque in STAR connection is enough to accelerate the load.
3.2.3 Motor Protection
Motor circuits have, in principle, two types of protection: motor

overload, locked rotor and protection of branch circuit from short
circuits. Motors in continuous use should be protected from
overloading by means of a device incorporated into the motor, or
by an independent device, usually a fixed or adjustable thermal
18
relay equal or less than to the value derived from multiplying the
rated feed current at full load by:
- 1.25 for motors with a service factor equal or superior to 1.15 or;
- 1.15 for motors with service factor equal to 1.0.
Some motors are optionally fitted with overheating protective
detectors (in the event of overload, locked rotor, low voltage,
inadequate motor ventilation) such as a thermostat (thermal probe),
thermistor (PTC), RTD type resistance which dispense with
independent devices.
THERMOSTAT (THERMAL PROBE): bimetallic thermal detectors
with normally closed silver contacts. These open at pre-determined
temperatures. Thermostats are series connected directly to the
contactor coil circuit by two conductors.
THERMISTORS: Semi-conductor heat detectors positive
temperature coeficient (PTC) that sharply change their resistance
upon reaching a set temperature. Thermistors, depending upon
the type, are series or parallel-connected to a control unit that cuts
out the motor feed, or actuates an alarm system, in response to the
thermistors reaction.
Resistance temperature detectors (RTD) PT 100
The resistance type heat detector (RTD) is a resistance element

usually manufactured of copper or platinum.
The RTD operates on the principle that the electrical resistance of a
metallic conductor varies linearly with the temperature. The
detector terminals are connected to a control panel, usually fitted
with a temperature gauge, a test resistance and a terminal
changeover switch.
Subject to the desired degree of safety and the clients specification,
three (one per phase) or six (two per phase) protective devices
can be fitted to a motor for the alarm stems, circuit breaker or
combined alarm and circuit breaker, with two leads from the
terminal box to the alarm or circuit breaker system and four for the
combined system (alarm and circuit breaker).
Table 9 compares the two methods of protection.
3.3 Start-up
3.3.1 Preliminary Inspection
Before starting a motor for the first time, it will be necessary to:
a) Remove all locking devices and blocks used in transit and
check that the motor rotates freely;
b) Check that the motor is firmly secured and that coupling
elements are correctly mounted and aligned.;
c) Ascertain that voltage and frequency correspond to those
indicated on the nameplate. Motor performance will be
satisfactory with main supply voltage fluctuation within ten per
cent of the value indicated on the nameplate or a frequency
fluctuation within five per cent or, yet, with a combined voltage
and frequency variance within ten per cent;

Table 9 - Comparison between motor protection system
d) Check that connections are in accordance with the connection
diagram shown on the nameplate and be sure that all terminal
screws and nuts are tight;
e) Check the motor for proper grounding. Providing that there are
no specifications calling for ground-insulated installation, the
motor must be grounded in accordance with prevalent standard
for grounding electrical machines. The screw identified by the
symbol
should be used for this purpose.
This screw is generally to be found in the terminal box or on
one foot of the frame;
Causes of
overheating
Current-based
protection
Fuse only
Fuse and
thermal
protector
Protection
with
probe
thermistor
in motor
f) Check that motor leads connecting with the mains, as well as the
control wires and the overload protection device, are in
accordance with Nema Standards;
g) If the motor has been stored in a damp place, or has been
stopped for some time, measure the insulating resistance as
recommended under the item covering storage instructions;
h) Start the motor uncoupled to ascertain that it is turning in the
desired direction. To reverse the rotation of a three-phase
motor, invert two terminal leads of the mains supply.
High voltage motors bearing an arrow on the frame indicating
rotation direction can only turn in the direction shown;
1. Overload with 1.2

times rated current
2. Duty cycles
S1 to S8
IEC 34, EB 120
3. Brakings, reversals
and frequent starts
4. Operating with more
than 15 starts p/hour
5. Locked rotor
6. Fault on one phase
7. Execessive voltage
fluctuation
8. Frequency
fluctuation on main
supply
9. Excessive ambient
temperature
10. External heating
caused by bearings,
belts, pulleys etc.
11. Obstructed
ventilation
Caption:
unprotected
partially protected
totally protected
19

CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
b) Star-Delta starting
a) Direct starting
POWER NETWORK
c) Auto-transformer starting
POWER NETWORK
20
POWER NETWOR

3.3.2 The First Start-up

Three-Phase Motor with Cage Rotor
After careful examination of the motor, follow the normal sequence
of starting operations listed in the control instructions for the initial
start-up.
3.3.3 Operation
Drive the motor coupled to the load for a period of at least one hour
while watching for abnormal noises or signs of overheating.
Compare the line current with the value shown on the nameplate.
Under continuous running conditions without load fluctuations this
should not exceed the rated current times the service factor, also
shown on the nameplate.
All measuring and control instruments and apparatus should be
continuously checked for anomalies, and any irregularities
corrected.
3.3.4 Stopping
Warning:
To touch any moving part of a running motor, even though
disconnected, is a danger to life and limb.
a) Three-phase motor with cage rotor:
Open the stator circuit switch. With the motor at a complete stop,
reset the auto-transformer, if any, to the start position;
21

Table 11 - Bearing specifications by type of motor
143 T
145 T
182 T
184 T
W 182 T
W 184 T
213 T
215 T
W 213 T
W 215 T
254 T
256 T
W 254 T
W 256 T
284 T and TS
286 T and TS
324 T and TS
326 T and TS
364 T and TS
365 T and TS
404 T
404 TS
405 T
405 TS
444 T
444 TS
445 T
445 TS
447 T
447 TS
449 T
449 TS
504 T
504 TS
505 T
505 TS
5008 T
5008TS
586 T
586 TS
587 T
587 TS
Saw Arbor
motor
frame
80 S MS
80 M MS
80 L MS
90 L MS
22
Rear (O.D.E.)
6202 Z
6202 Z
6202 Z
6202 Z /
6203 Z
Totally enclosed fan cooled motors

6205 ZZ
6205 ZZ
6307 ZZ
6307 ZZ
6206 ZZ
6206 ZZ
6308 ZZ
6308 ZZ
6308 ZZ
6308 ZZ
6309-C3
6309-C3
6309-C3
6309-C3
6311-C3
6311-C3
6312-C3
6312-C3
6314-C3
6314-C3
NU 316-C3
6314-C3
NU 316-C3
6314-C3
NU 319-C3
6314-C3
NU 319-C3
6314-C3
NU 319-C3
6314-C3
NU 322-C3
6314-C3
NU 319-C3
6314-C3
NU 319-C3
6314-C3
NU 322-C3
6314-C3
NU 322-C3
6314-C3
NU 322-C3
6314-C3
6204 ZZ
6204 ZZ
6206 ZZ
6206 ZZ
6205 ZZ
6205 ZZ
6207 ZZ
6207 ZZ
6207 ZZ
6207 ZZ
6209 Z-C3
6209 Z-C3
6209 Z-C3
6209 Z-C3
6211 Z-C3
6211 Z-C3
6212 Z-C3
6212 Z-C3
6314-C3
6314-C3
6314-C3
6314-C3
6314-C3
6414-C3
6316-C3
6314-C3
6316-C3
6314-C3
6316-C3
6314-C3
6319-C3
6314-C3
6316-C3
6314-C3
6316-C3
6314-C3
6319-C3
6314-C3
6319-C3
6314-C3
6319-C3
6314-C3
Mounting
B3
Bearings
Front (D.E.)
6307 ZZ
6307 ZZ
6307 ZZ
6308 ZZ
Rear (O.D.E.)
6207 ZZ
6207 ZZ
6207 ZZ
6208 ZZ
ODP Motors
Nema-T
frames
E143/5T
F143/5T
182 T
184 T
213/5T
254 T
256 T
284 T
284 TS
286 T
286 TS
324 T
324 TS
326 T
326 TS
364 T
364 TS
365 T
365 TS
404 T
404 TS
405 T
405 TS
444 T
444 TS
445 T
445 TS
IEC
frame
63
71
80
90 S - L
100 L
112 M
132 S - M
160 M - L
180 M - L
200 M - L
225 S/M
250 S/M
280 S/M
315 S/M
355 M/L
Mounting
HORIZONTAL MOUNTING ONLY
B48 and C48

56 and A56
B56 and C56
D56 and
F56H/G56H
Front (D.E.)
Open drip proof motors
6203 Z
6203 Z
6203 Z
6204 Z
ALL
FORMS
Frames
Bearings
Mounting
ALL FORMS
NEMA
Mounting
Bearings
Front (D.E.)
6205 ZZ
6205 ZZ
6206 ZZ
6202 ZZ
6208 ZZ
6309 Z-C3
6309 Z-C3
6311 Z-C3
6311 Z-C3
6311 Z-C3
6311 Z-C3
6312 Z-C3
6312 Z-C3
6312 Z-C3
6312 Z-C3
6314 C3
6314 C3
6314 C3
6314 C3
NU 316 C3
6314 C3
NU 316 C3
6314 C3
NU 319 C3
6314 C3
NU 319 C3
6314 C3
Rear (O.D.E.)
6204 ZZ
6204 ZZ
6205 ZZ
6205 ZZ
6206 ZZ
6209 Z-C3
6209 Z-C3
6211 Z-C3
6211 Z-C3
6211 Z-C3
6211 Z-C3
6212 Z-C3
6212 Z-C3
6212 Z-C3
6212 Z-C3
6314 C3
6314 C3
6314 C3
6314 C3
6314 C3
6314 C3
6314 C3
6314 C3
6316 C3
6314 C3
6316 C3
6314 C3
Bearings
Front (D.E.)
Rear (O.D.E.)
Totally enclosed fan cooled motors
6201 ZZ
6201 ZZ
6203 ZZ
6202 ZZ
6204 ZZ
6203 ZZ
6205 ZZ
6204 ZZ
6206 ZZ
6205 ZZ
6307 ZZ
6206 ZZ
6308 ZZ
6207 ZZ
6309-C3
6209 Z-C3
B3
6311-C3
6211 Z-C3
6312-C3
6212 Z-C3
6314-C3
6314-C3
6314-C3
6314-C3
6314-C3
6314-C3
6316-C3
6316-C3
6314-C3
6314-C3
6319-C3
6316-C3
6314-C3
6314-C3
NU 322-C3
6319-C3

Table 12 - Bearing lubrication intervals and amount of grease
1 - SINGLE-ROW FIXED BALL BEARINGS
Lubrication intervals (running hours)
Bearings
II Pole
IV Pole
60Hz
3600
rpm
50Hz
3000
rpm
6200
12500
13800
6201
11700
6202
6203
Characteristics
Ref.
VI Pole
60Hz
1200
rpm
50Hz
1000
rpm
VIII Pole
60Hz
900
rpm
50Hz
750
rpm
X Pole
60Hz
720
rpm
XII Pole
60Hz
1800
rpm
50Hz
1500
rpm
50Hz
600
rpm
60Hz
600
rpm
50Hz Amount
500 of grease
rpm
(oz)
13000
16600
18400
10500
11900
15400
17100
19500
0,07
9800
11200
14500
16200
18500
0,11
0,07
0,07
6204
8700
10100
13300
14800
17100
19100
6205
8000
9400
12600
14100
16200
18200
19300
0,14
> 20000
0,14
6206
7300
8700
12000
13400
15400
17200
18300
6207
6600
8100
11400
12700
14500
16300
17300
19200
0,18
0,25
6208
5900
7400
10800
12000
13700
15300
16300
18200
0,29
6209
5300
6900
10400
11600
13400
15000
16000
17800
0,29
6210
4900
6400
9700
11000
12900
14600
15600
17300
0,32
6211
4300
5900
9500
10900
12700
14400
15300
17000
0,39
6212
3800
5400
9300
10300
12400
14300
15200
16500
0,46
6213
3100
4900
8900
10100
12200
14000
14800
16100
0,50
6214
1100
2000
4100
5000
5900
6500
6900
7600
0,54
6215
1000
1800
4400
5000
5600
6300
6700
7600
0,61
6216
700
1600
4100
4700
5700
6500
6800
7500
0,68
6304
8700
10100
13300
14800
17100
19100
6305
8000
9400
12600
14100
16200
18200
19300
6306
7300
8700
12000
13400
15400
17200
18300
6307
6600
8100
11400
12700
14500
16300
17300
19200
6308
5900
7400
10800
12000
13700
15300
16300
18200
18600
0,14
0,21
0,25
> 20000
0,32
0,39
6309
5300
6900
10400
11600
13400
15000
16000
17800
18200
19900
6310
4900
6400
9700
11000
12900
14600
19500
17300
17700
19500
0,46
6311
4300
5900
9500
10900
12700
14400
15300
17000
17400
6312
3800
5400
9300
10300
12400
14300
15200
16500
16800
6313
3100
4900
8900
10100
12200
14000
14800
16100
16400
17900
17900
19700
0,86
6314
1100
2000
4100
5000
5900
6500
6900
7600
7700
8600
8600
9600
0,96
6315
1000
1800
4400
5000
5600
6300
6700
7600
7900
8900
8900
9900
1,07
6316
700
1600
4100
4700
5700
6500
6800
7500
7700
8500
8500
9500
1,22
6317
800
1300
3900
4700
5600
6300
6700
7400
7500
8300
8300
9300
1,32
6318
1000
3800
4600
5500
6200
6600
7200
7400
8200
8200
9100
1,47
6319
800
3700
4500
5400
6100
6500
7100
7300
8000
8000
8900
1,61
6320
3600
4300
5300
6000
6300
7000
7100
7900
7900
8800
1,82
6321
3400
4200
5100
5800
6200
6800
7000
7800
7800
8700
2,00
6322
3100
4000
5000
5700
6100
6700
6900
7700
7700
8600
2,14
19500
0,54
19000
19000
0,64
18200
18200
0,75
1) Lubrication periodicity valid for NLG 1 and lithium based bearing lubricant.
2) Bearings for motors of X and XII poles - Lubrication Intervals > 20,000.
23

Table 13 - Bearing lubrication intervals and amount of grease
2 - CYLINDRICAL ROLLER BEARINGS
Lubrication intervals (running hours)
Bearings
U
3
IV Pole
VI Pole
X Pole
XII Pole
50Hz
3000
rpm
60Hz
1800
rpm
50Hz
1500
rpm
60Hz
1200
rpm
50Hz
1000
rpm
60Hz
900
rpm
50Hz
750
rpm
60Hz
720
rpm
50Hz
600
rpm
60Hz
600
rpm
50Hz Amount
500 of grease
rpm
(oz)
NU309
2800
4000
8300
9500
10700
11800
12500
14100
14500
16300
16300
18200
0,46
NU310
2400
3600
7900
9100
10300
11400
12200
13700
14000
15800
15800
17700
0,54
NU311
2000
3200
7400
8700
10000
11000
11800
13300
13600
15400
15400
17200
0,64
NU312
1600
2700
6900
8300
9600
10700
11400
12800
13200
14900
14900
16800
0,75
NU313
1500
2500
6600
8100
9400
10500
11200
12700
13000
14700
14700
16500
0,86
NU314
700
1100
3100
3900
4600
5200
5500
6200
6400
7200
7200
8100
0,96
NU315
900
2900
3800
4500
5100
5500
6200
6300
7100
7100
7900
1,07
NU316
800
2800
3600
4400
5000
5400
6100
6200
7000
7000
7800
1,22
NU317
600
2600
3500
4300
4900
5300
6000
6100
6900
6900
7700
1,32
NU318
2100
3300
4300
4900
5300
5900
6000
6700
6700
7500
1,47
NU319
2300
3200
4100
4700
5100
5800
6000
6700
6700
7500
1,61
NU320
2000
3000
4000
4700
5000
5700
5900
6600
6600
7300
1,82
NU321
1900
2800
4000
4600
4900
5600
5700
6500
6500
7200
2,00
NU322
1900
2600
3900
4400
4800
5500
5600
6400
6400
7100
2,14
1) Lubrication periodicity valid for NLG 1 and 2 lithium based bearing lubricant.
24
VIII Pole
60Hz
3600
rpm
Characteristics
Ref.
N
II Pole

4. Maintenance
A well-designed maintenance program for electric motors can be
summed up as: periodical inspection of insulation levels,
temperature rise, wear, bearing lubrication and the occasional
checking of fan air flow.
Inspection cycles depend upon the type of motor and the conditions
under which it operates.
4.1 Cleanliness
Motors should be kept clean, free of dust, debris and oil. Soft
brushes or clean cotton rags should be used for cleaning. A jet of
compressed air should be used to remove non-abrasive dust from
the fan cover and any accumulated grime from the fan and cooling
fins.
Oil or damp impregnated impurities can be removed with rags
soaked in a suitable solvent.
Terminal boxes fitted to motors with IP55 protection should be
cleaned; their terminals should be free of oxidation, in perfect
mechanical condition, and all unused space dust-free.
Motors with IPW 55 protection are recommended for use under
unfavourable ambient conditions.
4.2 Lubrication
Proper lubrication extends bearing life.
Lubrication Maintenance Includes:

a) Attention to the overall state of the bearings;
b) Cleaning and lubrication;
c) Critical inspection of the bearings.
Motor noise should be measured at regular intervals of one to four

months. A well-tuned ear is perfectly capable of distinguishing
unusual noises, even with rudimentary tools such as a screw
driver, etc., without recourse to sophisticated listening aids or
stethescopes that are available on the market.
A uniform hum is a sign that a bearing is running perfectly. Bearing
temperature control is also part of routine maintenance. The
temperature of bearings lubricated as recommended under item
4.2.2 should not exceed 70C.
Constant temperature control is possible with the aid of external
thermometers or by embedded thermal elements. WEG motors are
normally equipped with grease lubricated ball or roller bearings.
Bearings should be lubricated to avoid metallic contact of the
moving parts, and also for protection against corrosion and wear.
Lubricant properties deteriorate in the course of time and
mechanical operation: furthermore, all lubricants are subject to
contamination under working conditions.
For this reason lubricants must be renewed and any lubricant
consumed needs replacing from time to time.
4.2.1 Periodical Lubrication
WEG motors are supplied with sufficient grease for a long running
period. Lubrication intervals, the amount of grease and the type of

bearing used in frames 140T to 580T are to be found in Tables 11,
12 and 13.
Lubrication intervals depend upon the size of the motor, speed,
working conditions and the type of grease used.
4.2.2 Quality and Quantity of Grease
Correct lubrication is important!

Grease must be applied correctly and in sufficient quantity as both
insufficient or excessive greasing are harmful.
Excessive greasing causes overheating brought about by the
greater resistance encountered by the rotating parts and, in
particular, by the compacting of the lubricant and its eventual loss of
lubricating qualities.
This can cause seepage with the grease penetrating the motor and
dripping on the coils.
A lithium based grease is commonly used for the lubrication of
electric motor bearings as it has good mechanical stability, is
insoluble in water and has a drip point of approximately 200C.
This grease should never be mixed with sodium or calcium based
greases.
GREASES FOR MOTOR BEARINGS
For operating temperatures from - 20 to 130C
Frame
Supplier
Grease
Temperature range
143T-215T
254T to 586/7
Shell
Esso
Alvania R3
Unirex N2
-20 to 130C
-30 to 165C
Substitutes
Supplier
Grease
Temperature Range
Mobil
ESSO
Atlantic
Texaco
Molikote
Inisilkon
Mobilith SHC100
Beacon 2
Litholine 2
Multifak 2
BG 20
L5012
-40 to 177C
-20 to 130C
-20 to 130C
-20 to 130C
-45 to 180C
-20 to 200C
Note: When changing lubricant, please follow manfacturers

instructions
4.2.3 Lubricating Instructions

a) Frame 140T to 210T motors
Frame 140T to 210T size motors are not fitted with grease nipples.
Lubrication is carried out during periodical overhauls when the
motor is taken apart.
Cleaning and Lubrication of Bearings

With the motor dismantled and without extracting the bearings from
the shaft, all existing grease should be removed and the bearings
cleaned with Diesel oil, kerosene or other solvent, until thoroughly
clean.
25

Refill the spaces between the balls or rollers and the bearing cages
with grease immediately after washing. Never rotate bearings in
their dry state after washing.
For inspection purposes apply a few drops of machine oil. During
these operations maximum care and cleanliness is recommended
to avoid the penetration of any impurities or dust that could harm the
bearings. Clean all external parts prior to reassembly.
b) Frame 360T to 580T Motors
Motors above 360T frame size are fitted with regreasable bearing
system.
The lubrication system from this frame size upwards was designed
to allow the removal of all grease from the bearing races through a
bleeder outlet which at the same time impedes the entry of dust or
other contaminants harmful to the bearing.
This outlet also prevents injury to the bearings from the well-known
problem of over-greasing.
It is advisable to lubricate while the motor is running, to allow the
renewal of grease in the bearing case.
Should this procedure not be possible because of rotating parts in
the proximity of the nipple (pulleys, coupling sleeves, etc.) that are
hazardous to the operator the following procedure should be
followed:
- Inject about half the estimated amount of grease and run the motor
at full speed for approximately a minute; switch off the motor and
inject the remaining grease.
The injection of all the grease with the motor at rest could cause
penetration of a portion of the lubricant through the internal seal of
the bearing case and hence into the motor.
Nipples must be clean prior to introduction of grease to avoid entry

of any alien bodies into the bearing.
For lubricating use only a manual grease gun.
Bearing Lubrication Steps

1. Cleanse the area around the grease nipples with clean cotton
fabric.
2. With the motor running, add grease with a manual grease gun
until the lubricant commences to be expelled from the bleeder
outlet, or until the quantity of grease recommended in Tables 12
or 13 has been applied.
3. Allow the motor to run long enough to eject all excess grease.
4.2.4 Replacement of Bearings
The opening of a motor to replace a bearing should only be

carried out by qualified personnel.
Damage to the core after the removal of the bearing cover can be
avoided by filling the gap between the rotor and the stator with stiff
paper of a proper thickness.
Providing suitable tooling is employed, disassembly of a bearing is
not difficult.
The extractor grips should be applied to the sidewall of the inner
ring to be stripped, or to an adjacent part.
To ensure perfect functioning and to prevent injury to the bearing
parts, it is essential that the assembly be undertaken under
conditions of complete cleanliness and by competent personnel.
New bearings should not be removed from their packages until the
moment of assembly.
Prior to fitting a new bearing, ascertain that the shaft has no rough
edges or signs of hammering.
Figure 4.2 - A bearing extractor
Figure 4.1 - Bearings and lubrication system
26
During assembly bearings cannot be subjected to direct blows.

The aid used to press or strike the bearing should be applied to the
inner ring.

4.3
Air Gap Checking (Large Rating Open

Motors)
IMPREGNATION
Protect all frame threads by inserting corresponding bolts, and the
joint between terminal box and frame, by coating it with a nonadhesive varnish (ISO 287 - ISOLASIL).
Protective varnish on machined parts should be removed soon
after treating with impregnating varnish. This operation should be
carried out manually without using tools.
Explosion Proof Motor Repair Steps
ASSEMBLY
Inspect all parts for defects, such as cracks, joint incrustations,
damaged threads and other potential problems.
Assemble using a rubber headed mallet and a bronze bushing
after ascertaining that all parts are perfectly fitted.
Bolts should be positioned with corresponding spring washers and
evenly tightened.
Upon the completion of any work on the bearings check the gap
measurement between the stator and the rotor using the
appropriate gazes.
The gap variation at any two vertically opposite points must be less
than 10% of the average gap measurement.
4.4
4.4.1 Objective
In view of the heavy liability associated with burning of motors of

this type, this product has been designed and manufactured to high
technical standards, under rigid controls. In addition, in many areas
it is required that explosion proof motors ONLY be repaired by
licensed personnel or in licensed facilities authorized to do this type
of work.
The following general procedures, safeguards, and guidelines
must be followed in order to ensure repaired explosion proof
motors operate as intended.
4.4.2
Repair Procedure and Precautions
Dismantle the damaged motor with appropriate tools without

hammering and/or pitting machined surfaces such as enclosure
joints, fastening holes, and all joints in general.
The position of the fan cover should be suitably marked prior to
removal so as to facilitate reassembly later on.
Examine the motors general condition and, if necessary,
disassemble all parts and clean them with kerosene. Under no
circumstances should scrapers, emery papers or tools be used that
could affect the dimensions of any part during cleaning.
Protect all machined parts against oxidation by applying a coating
of vaseline or oil immediately after cleaning.
STRIPPING OF WINDINGS
This step requires great care to avoid knocking and/or denting of
enclosure joints and, when removing the sealing compound from
the terminal box, damage or cracking of the frame.
TESTING
Rotate the shaft by hand while examining for any drag problems on
covers or fastening rings.
Carry out running tests as for standard motors.
MOUNTING THE TERMINAL BOX
Prior to fitting the terminal box all cable outlets on the frame should
be sealed with a sealing compound (Ist layer) and an Epoxy resin
(ISO 340) mixed with ground quartz (2nd layer) in the following
proportions:
340A resin
340B resin
Ground quartz
50 parts
50 parts
100 parts
Drying time for this mixture is two hours during which the frame
should not be handled and cable outlets should be upwards.
When dry, see that the outlets and areas around the cables are
perfectly sealed.
Mount the terminal box and paint the motor.
4.4.3
Miscellaneous Recommendations
Any damaged parts (cracks, pittings in machined surfaces,

defective threads) must be replaced and under no
circumstances should attempts be made to recover them.
Upon reassembling explosion proof motors IPW55 the
substitution of all seals is mandatory.
Should any doubts arise, consult WEG.
27

5. Malfunctioning
Most malfunctions affecting the normal running of electric motors can
be prevented by maintenance and the appropriate precautions.
While ventilation, cleanliness and careful maintenance are the main
factors ensuring long motor life, a further essential factor is the
prompt attention to any malfunctioning as signalled by vibrations,
shaft knock, declining insulation resistance, smoke or fire, sparking
or unusual slip ring or brush wear, sudden changes of bearing
temperatures.
When failures of an electric or mechanical nature arise, the first step
to be taken is to stop the motor and subsequent examination of all
mechanical and electrical parts of the installation.
In the event of fire, the installation should be isolated from the mains
supply, which is normally done by turning off the respective
switches.
In the event of fire within the motor itself, steps should be taken to
restrain and suffocate it by covering the ventilation vents.
To extinguish a fire, dry chemical or C02 extinguishers should be
used - never water.
5.1 Standard Three-Phase

Motor Failures
Owing to the widespread usage of asynchronous three-phase

motors in industry which are more often repaired in the plant
workshops, there follows a summary of possible failures and their
probable causes, detection and repairs.
Motors are generally designed to Class B or F insulation and for
ambient temperatures up to 40C.
Most winding defects arise when temperature limits, due to current
overload, are surpassed throughout the winding or even in only
portions thereof. These defects are identified by the darkening or
carbonizing of wire insulation.
5.1.1 Short Circuits Between Turns
A short circuit between turns can be a consequent of two coinciding

insulation defects, or the result of defects arising simultaneously on
two adjacent wires. As wires are randomly tested, even the best
quality wires can have weak spots. Weak spots can, on occasion,
tolerate a voltage surge of 30% at the time of testing for shorting
between turns, and later fail due to humidity, dust or vibration.
Depending on the intensity of the short, a magnetic hum becomes
audible.
In some cases, the three-phase current imbalance can be so
insignificant that the motor protective device fails to react. A short
circuit between turns, and phases to ground due to insulation failure
is rare, and even so, it nearly always occurs during the early
stages of operation.
5.1.2 Winding Failures

a) One burnt winding phase
This failure arises when a motor runs wired in delta and current
fails in one main conductor.
Current rises from 2 to 2.5 times in the remaining winding with a
28
simultaneous marked fall in speed. If the motor stops, the current will
increase from 3.5 to 4 times its rated value.
In most instances, this defect is due to the absence of a protective
switch, or else the switch has been set too high.
b) Two burnt winding phases
This failure arises when current fails in one main conductor and the
motor winding is star-connected. 0ne of the winding phases
remains currentless while the others absorb the full voltage and
carry an excessive current.
The slip almost doubles.
c) Three burnt winding phases
Probable cause 1
Motor only protected by fuses; an overload on the motor will be the
cause of the trouble.
Consequently, progressive carbonizing of the wires and insulation
culminate in a short circuit between turns, or a short against the
frame occurs.
A protective switch placed before the motor would easily solve this
problem.
Probable cause 2
Motor incorrectly connected. For example: A motor with windings
designed for 230/400V is connected through a star-delta switch to
400V connection.
The absorted current will be so high that the winding will burn out in
a few seconds if the fuses or a wrongly set protective switch fail to
react promptly.
Probable cause 3
The star-delta switch is not commutated and the motor continues to
run for a time connected to the star under overload conditions.
As it only develops 1/3 of its torque, the motor cannot reach rated
speed. The increased slip results in higher ohmic losses arising
from the Joule effect. As the stator current, consistent with the load,
may not exceed the rated value for the delta connection, the
protective switch will not react.
Consequent to increased winding and rotor losses the motor will
overheat and the winding burn out.
Probable cause 4
Failures from this cause arise from thermal overload, due to too
many starts under intermittent operation or to an overly long starting
cycle. The perfect functioning of motor operating under these
conditions is only assured when the following values are heeded:
a) number of starts per hour;
b) starting with or without load;
c) mechanical brake or current inversion;
d) acceleration of rotating masses connected to motor shaft
e) load torque vs. speed during acceleration and braking.
The continuous effort exerted by the rotor during intermittent starting
brings about heavier losses which provoke overheating.
Under certain circumstances with the motor idle there is a possibility
that the stator winding is subjected to damage as a result of the

heating of the motor. In such a case, a slip ring motor is

recommended as a large portion of the heat (due to rotor losses) is
dissipated in the rheostat.
5.1.3 Rotor Failures
If a motor running under load conditions produces a noise of

varying intensity and decreasing frequency while the load is
increased, the reason, in most cases, will be an unsymmetrical
rotor winding.
In squirrel-cage motors the cause will nearly always be a break in
one or more of the rotor bars; simultaneously, periodical stator
current fluctuations may be recorded. As a rule, this defect appears
only in molded or die cast aluminum cages.
Failures due to spot heating in one or another of the bars in the
rotor stack are identified by the blue coloration at the affected points.
Should there be failures in various contiguous bars, vibrations and
shuddering can occur as if due to an unbalance, and are often
interpreted as such. When the rotor stack acquires a blue or violet
coloration, it is a sign of overloading.
This can be caused by overly high slip, by too many starts or
overlong starting cycles. This failure can also arise from insufficient
main voltage.
5.1.4 Bearing Failures
Bearing damage is a result of overloading brought about by an

overly taut belt or axial impacts and stresses.
Underestimating the distance between the drive pulley and the
driven pulley is a common occurrence.
The arc of contact of the belt on the drive pulley thus becomes
inadmissibly small and thereby belt tension is insufficient for torque
transmission.
In spite of this it is quite usual to increase belt tension in order to
attain sufficient drive.
Admittably, this is feasible with the latest belt types reinforced by
synthetic materials.
However, this practice fails to consider the load on the bearing and
the result is bearing failure within a short time.
Additionally there is the possibility of the shaft being subjected to
unacceptably high loads when the motor is fitted with a pulley that is
too wide.
5.1.6
Unbalanced V-Belt Drives
5.1.7
Damage Arising from Poorly

Fitted Transmission Parts or
Improper Motor Alignment
The substitution of only one of a number of other parallel belts on a

drive is frequently the cause of shaft fractures, as well as being
malpractice.
Any used, and consequently stretched belts retained on the drive,
especially those closest to the motor, while new and unstretched
belts are placed on the same drive turning farther from the bearing,
can augment shaft stress.
Damage to bearing and fracture in shafts often ensue from

inadequate fitting of pulleys, couplings or pinions. There parts
knock when rotating. The defect is recognized by the scratches
that appear on the shaft or the eventual scalelike flaking of the shaft
end.
Keyways with edges pitted by loosely fitted keys can also bring
about shaft failures.
Poorly aligned couplings cause knocks and radial and axial
shaking to shaft and bearings.
Within a short while these malpractices cause the deterioration of
the bearings and the enlargement of the bearing cover bracket
located on the drive end side.
Shaft fracture can occur in more serious cases.
5.1.5 Shaft Fractures
Although bearings traditionally constitute the weaker part, and the

shafts are designed with wide safety margins, it is not beyond the
realm of possibility that a shaft may fracture by fatigue from bending
stress brought about by excessive belt tension.
In most cases, fractures occur right behind the drive end bearing.
As a consequence of alternating bending stress induced by a
rotating shaft, fractures travel inwards from the outside of the shaft
until the point of rupture is reached when resistance of the
remaining shaft cross-section no longer suffices.
Avoid additional drilling the shaft (fastening screw holes) as such
operations tend to cause stress concentration.
29

5.2 Troubleshooting chart

FAILURE
Motor fails to start
PROBABLE CAUSE
1.No voltage supply
2. Low voltage supply
3. Wrong control connections
4. Loose connection at some
terminal lug
5. Overload
High noise level
1. Unbalance
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Distorted shaft
Incorrect alignment
Uneven air gap
Dirt in the air gap
Extraneous matter stuck between
fan and motor casing
7. Loose motor foundation
8. Worn bearings
Overheating of bearings
1. Excessive grease
2.
3.
4.
5.
Excessive axial or radial strain on belt

Deformed shaft
Rough bearing surface
Loose or poorly fitted motor end
shields
6. Lack of grease
7. Hardened grease cause locking of
balls
8. Foreign material in grease
Intense bearing vibration
1. Unbalanced rotor
2. Dirty or worn bearing
3. Bearing rings too tight on shaft
and/or bearing housing
4. Extraneous solid particles in
bearing
Overheating of motor
1. Obstructed cooling system

2. Overload
3. Incorrect voltages and frequecies
4. Frequent inversions
5. Rotor dragging on stator
6. Unbalanced electrical load
(burnt fuse, incorrect control)
30
CORRECTIVE MEASURES
Check feed connections to control system and from this to motor.
Check voltage supply and ascertain that voltage remains
within 10% of the rated voltage shown on the motor nameplate.
Compare connections with the wiring diagram on the
motor nameplate.
Tighten all connections.
Try to start motor under no-load conditions. If it starts,
there may be an overload condition or a blocking of
the starting mechanism. Reduce load to rated load level
and increase torque.
Vibrations can be eliminated by balancing rotor. If load is
coupled directly to motor shaft, the load can be unbalanced.
Shaft key bent; check rotor balance and eccentricity.
Check motor aligment with machine running.
Check shaft for warping or bearing wear.
Dismantle motor and remove dirt or dust with jet of dry air.
Dismantle motor and clean. Remove trash or debris from
motor vicinity.
Tighten all foundation studs. If necessary, realign motor.
Check lubrication. Replace bearing if noise is excessive
and continuous.
Remove grease bleeder plug and run motor until excess
grease is expelled.
Reduce belt tension.
Have shaft straightened and check rotor balance.
Replace bearings before they damage shaft.
Check end shields for close fit and tightness around circumference.
Add grease to bearing.
Replace bearings.
Flush out housings and relubricate.
Balance rotor statically and dynamically.
If bearing rings are in perfect condition, clean and
relubricate the bearing, otherwise, replace bearing.
Before altering shaft or housing dimensions, it is advisable
to ascertain that bearing dimensions correspond to
manufacturers specifications.
Take bearing apart and clean. Reassemble only if rotating
and support surfaces are unharmed.
Clean and dry motor; inspect air vents and windings periodically.
Check application, measuring voltage and current under
normal running conditions.
Compare values on motor nameplate with those of mains
supply. Also check voltage at motor terminals under full load.
Exchange motor for another that meets needs.
Check bearing wear and shaft curvature.
Check for unbalanced voltages or operation under
single-phase condition.

6. Spare Parts and

Component Terminology
THREE-PHASE MOTORS IP55 NEMA Frames 140T - W180T - 180T - 210T and W210T
Part Nr.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
Description
Terminal box cover

Terminal box cover fixing bolt
Terminal box cover gasket
Terminal box fixing bolt
Terminal box fixing washer
Terminal box grounding lug
Terminal box
Frame grounding lug
Terminal box oring gasket
Fan cover
Fan cover fixing bolt
Fan
Part Nr.
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Description
VRing
Non-drive end endshield fixing bolt
Non-drive end endshield washer
Non-drive endshield
Spring washer
Non-drive bearing
Fan fixing pin
Wound stator
Rotor / shaft assembly
Nameplate fixing rivet
Nameplate
Frame
Part Nr.
25
26
27
28
29
33
31
Description
Shaft key
Drive end bearing
Drive endshield
Drive endshield washer
Drive end endshield fixing bolt
VRing
Drain plug
THREE-PHASE MOTORS IP55 NEMA Frames 250T - W250T - 280T and 320T
Part Nr.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Description
Terminal box cover

Terminal box
Frame grounding lug
Fan cover
Fan cover washer
Fan
Non-drive end bearing cap bolt
VRing
Part Nr.
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
Description
Non-drive end endshield fixing

bolt
Non-drive end bearing cap washer
Non-drive end grease nipple
Non-drive end grease nipple cover
Non-drive endshield
Spring washer
Non-drive end bearing
Non-drive end bearing cap
Fan fixing pin
Wound stator
Rotor and shaft
Eyebolt
Part Nr.
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
Description
Nameplate
Frame
Shaft key
Drive end bearing cap
Drive end bearing
Drive andshield
Drive end grease nipple cover
Drive end bearing cap washer
VRing
Drive end bearing cap fixing bolt
Drain plug
Non-drive and grease relief
Drive end grease relief
31

THREE-PHASE MOTORS IP55 NEMA T Frames 360T - 400T - 440T - 500T and 580T
Part Nr.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
32
Description
Terminal box cover

Terminal box cover washer
Terminal box
Frame grounding lug
Nameplate
Eyebolt
Fan cover
Fan cover washer
Fan fixing ring
Part Nr.
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
Description
Fan
Non-drive end bearing cap bolt
VRing
Non-drive end bearing cap washer
Non-drive end endshield fixing
bolt
Non-drive end grease nipple
Non-drive end grease nipple cover
Non-drive enshield
Bearing cap
Non-drive bearing
Internal non-drive end bearing cap
Fan fixing key
Wound stator
Frame
Part Nr.
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
Description
Shaft key
Internal drive end bearing cap
Drive end bearing
Drive endshield
Drive end grease nipple cover
Pre-load spring
External drive end bearing cap
Drive end bearing cap washer
VRing
Drive end bearing cap fixing bolt
Drain plug
External non-drive end bearing
cap
Non drive end grease relief
Non-drive end grease relief

THREE-PHASE MOTORS NEMA 56 Frames A56 - B56 - D56 - F56H and G56H
Part Nr.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Description
Sticker
Terminal box cover
Grounding lug
Through bolt fastening nut
Non-drive endshield
Spring washer
Part Nr.
8
9
10
11
12
13
Description
Non-drive end bearing

Wound stator
Frame
Through bolt
Shaft key
Part Nr.
14
15
16
17
Description
Fan
Drive end bearing fastening
washer
Drive end bearing
Drive endshield
SINGLE-PHASE MOTORS NEMA 56 Frames B48 - C48 - C56 - A56 - B56 - D56 - F56H - G56H
Part Nr.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Note:
Description
Sticker
Capacitor cover fixing bolt
Terminal box cover
Grounding lug
Through bolt fastening nut
Non-drive endshield
Spring washer
Non-drive and bearing
Non-drive and bearing fastening
washer
Stationary switch
For F56H and G56H frame motors: 1)
Part Nr.
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
Description
Stationary switch fastening bolt

Centrifugal switch
Rubber ring for lead passing hole
to capacitor
Capacitor cover
Capacitor
Wound stator
Frame
Through bolt
Shaft key
Fan
Part nr. 2 = 3 pieces;
Part Nr.
23
24
25
26
27
Description
Drive end bearing fastening

washer
Drive end bearing
Drive endshield
Overload thermal protector fixing
ring
Overload thermal protector
2) Part nr. 15 and 16 = 2 pieces
33

NOTES:
34

NOTES:
35
THE FOLLOWING
INSTALLATION AND
MAINTENANCE MANUALS
ARE AVAILABLE
Low and High Voltage

Large Motors
Induction, Slip Ring,
H Line, M Line, A Line
DC Motors
Tacho Generator
Dynamo
Generators GTA Line
YOU CAN REQUEST THE
ABOVE MANUALS FROM
YOUR NEAREST WEG
SALES OFFICE.
Call 1-800-ASK-4WEG
WEG Electric Motors Corp.
2100 Brighton-Henrietta Townline Road

Rochester NY 14623
PHONE: 716-240-1000
FAX: 716-240-1034
List of Recommended Spare Parts

Client : Votorantim Metais-Cajamarquilla S.A.

Order Number : 15539-40060
Continental Reference : FT-08-15991
Equipment : Bucket Elevators, Type COC-16824
TE-240-0032D
#D2358.4412
TE-240-0033D
#D2407.4412
TE-240-0034D
#D2359.4412
TE-240-0035D
#D2408.4412
Total Quantity
Recomended Qty
G.A. Drawing
Item number
TB-410-2691A-1
1B
1B
1B
1B
Segmental hardened sprocket for elevator 10 teeths, pitch 6, 19.42 PD for chain #SS-844, 2-15/16 dia. bore
TD-450-1390A
1C
1C
1C
1C
Tool steel sleeve
TD-420-0553A
M1A
M1A
M1A
M1A
TD-420-0084A-7
M1B
M1B
M1B
M1B
N/A
2C
TB-410-2691A-2
3B
3B
3B
3B
TD-450-1391A
3C
3C
3C
3C
FAG Pillow Block #FSAFD-22528-415TA x 4-15/16 dia. c/w Taconite seal, 4 bolts mounting, O.E.C. float.
N/A
M3A
M3A
M3A
M3A
FAG Pillow Block #FSAFD-22528-415TA x 4-15/16 dia. c/w Taconite seal, 4 bolts mounting, B.E.O. fix.
Nord Right angle hollow shaft mounted reducer #SK9086.1 AZ K BH R-IEC180L, 90.5:1 ratio, output speed 20 RPM, 1.81 S.F.,
120mm dia. bore, output shaft A, II clockwise c/w C - Face adaptor flange IEC180L.
120mm dia. bore, output shaft B, II clockwise c/w C - Face adaptor flange IEC180L.
120mm dia. bore, output shaft B, II counterclockwise c/w C - Face adaptor flange IEC180L
120mm dia. bore, output shaft A, II counterclockwise c/w C - Face adaptor flange IEC180L
WEG Electric motor 22KW (30HP), 1750 RPM, 440v/3ph/60hz, TEFC, IEC frame #180L c/w adapter A flange for IEC180L motor
N/A
M3B
M3B
M3B
M3B
TE-240-0032D-M4A
M4A
M4A
Continental
Part Number
Description
Boot shaft 2-15/16dia. (SAE-1045)
White iron bearing 2-15/16 dia., M.S.

Industries 3R Feutre Nomex 100 , 3/16 x x 4340 LG.
Head shaft 4-15/16 dia. (SAE-1045)
Segmental hardened sprocket for elevator 13 teeths, pitch 6, 25.07 PD for chain #SS-844, 4-15/16 dia. bore
TE-240-0033D-M4A
Bushed rollerless conveyor chain #JKBSR844-K22, x 201-0LG, 6 pitch, 55K UTS-cottered with K22 attachment every 2
M4A
TE-240-0035D-M4A
N/A
M4B
M4B
M4B
M4B
N/A
M4C
M4C
M4C
M4C
TB-240-0145A
5A
5A
5A
5A
920
92
N/A
M5A
M5A
Bushed rollerless conveyor chain #JKBSR844-K22, x 259-0LG, 6 pitch, 55K UTS-cottered with K22 attachment every 2nd link both sides.
nd
M4A
TE-240-0034D-M4A
Eurodrive Electronic overload monitor, Unipower #HPL430-440V

Bucket style DH 16 x 8 x 11-5/8 (12c/c pitch) c/w 3/8tk. AR-400 front
2C
link both sides.
N/A
M5A
M5A
Telemecanique Proximity switch #XS4P18MA230, 115v/1ph/60hz
N/A
M6A
M6A
M6A
M6A
Telemecanique Zero speed switch #XSAV-11801, AC/DC 2 wire, 115v/1ph/60hz
N/A
M6B
M6B
M6B
M6B
/SN
Date: 27-08-2008
Revision : 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
470, St-Alphonse S., Thetford Mines, Quebec, Canada G6G 3V8; Tel: (418) 338-4682 - Fax: (418) 338-4751 - Internet: infoqc@continentalconveyor.ca
Page 1 of 1

Iom - Bucket Elevators PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Iom - Bucket Elevators PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Iom - Bucket Elevators PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Installation, Operating & Maintenance Manual

Continuous Chain Type Bucket Elevator

SHIPPING & RECEIVING

10. INITIAL OPERATION

11. NORMAL OPERATION

12. INSPECTION & MAINTENANCE

CONTINENTAL CONVEYOR & MACHINE WORKS LTD.

Installation, Operating & Maintenance Manual

Continuous Chain Type Bucket Elevator

CONTINENTAL CONVEYOR & MACHINE WORKS LTD.

Installation, Operating & Maintenance Manual

Continuous Chain Type Bucket Elevator

Covers and guards

Do not walk on the bucket elevator covers or gratings or power transmission

CONTINENTAL CONVEYOR & MACHINE WORKS LTD.

Installation, Operating & Maintenance Manual

Continuous Chain Type Bucket Elevator

SHIPPING AND RECEIVING

CONTINENTAL CONVEYOR & MACHINE WORKS LTD.

Installation, Operating & Maintenance Manual

Continuous Chain Type Bucket Elevator

CONTINENTAL CONVEYOR & MACHINE WORKS LTD.

Installation, Operating & Maintenance Manual

Continuous Chain Type Bucket Elevator

CONTINENTAL CONVEYOR & MACHINE WORKS LTD.

Installation, Operating & Maintenance Manual

Continuous Chain Type Bucket Elevator

Steel split upper head section

Roller bearing pillow blocks and

Self supporting casing with steel

Steel boot section

10. Front and rear access panels

CONTINENTAL CONVEYOR & MACHINE WORKS LTD.

Installation, Operating & Maintenance Manual

Continuous Chain Type Bucket Elevator

CONTINENTAL CONVEYOR & MACHINE WORKS LTD.

Installation, Operating & Maintenance Manual

Continuous Chain Type Bucket Elevator

Care must be taken not to disturb the boot section.

CONTINENTAL CONVEYOR & MACHINE WORKS LTD.

Installation, Operating & Maintenance Manual

Continuous Chain Type Bucket Elevator

CONTINENTAL CONVEYOR & MACHINE WORKS LTD.

Installation, Operating & Maintenance Manual

Continuous Chain Type Bucket Elevator

CONTINENTAL CONVEYOR & MACHINE WORKS LTD.

Installation, Operating & Maintenance Manual

Continuous Chain Type Bucket Elevator

CONTINENTAL CONVEYOR & MACHINE WORKS LTD.

Installation, Operating & Maintenance Manual

Continuous Chain Type Bucket Elevator

CONTINENTAL CONVEYOR & MACHINE WORKS LTD.

Installation, Operating & Maintenance Manual

Continuous Chain Type Bucket Elevator

CONTINENTAL CONVEYOR & MACHINE WORKS LTD.

Installation, Operating & Maintenance Manual

Continuous Chain Type Bucket Elevator

CONTINENTAL CONVEYOR & MACHINE WORKS LTD.

Installation, Operating & Maintenance Manual